604262

Toyota Hilux 2014 Handleiding

535
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/540
Pagina verder
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Pictorial index
Search by illustration
1
For safety
and security
Make sure to read through them
2
Instrument
cluster
How to read the gauges and meters, the variety of
warning lights and indicators, etc.
3
Operation of
each component
Opening and closing the doors and windows,
adjustment before driving, etc.
4
Driving
Operations and advices which are necessary for driving
5
Interior features
Usage of the interior features, etc.
6
Maintenance
and care
Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures
7
When trouble
arises
What to do in case of malfunction or emergency
8
Vehicle
specifications
Vehicle specifications, etc.
Index
Search by symptom
Search alphabetically
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 1 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For your information .......................8
Reading this manual.....................16
How to search ..............................17
Pictorial index ...............................18
1-1. For safe use
Before driving.......................42
For safety drive ....................44
Seat belts.............................46
SRS airbags.........................51
Safety information
for children.........................63
Child restraint systems ........64
Installing child restraints ......75
Exhaust gas precautions .....84
1-2. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system ...............................85
Alarm ...................................89
2. Instrument cluster
Warning lights
and indicators ....................94
Gauges and meters ...........100
Multi-information display ....104
3-1. Key information
Keys .................................. 112
3-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Wireless remote control .... 115
Side doors ......................... 129
Tailgate ............................. 133
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats ........................ 136
Rear seats......................... 139
Head restraints.................. 141
3-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel .................. 144
Inside rear view mirror....... 145
Outside rear view
mirrors............................. 146
3-5. Opening and closing
the windows
Power windows ................. 149
Quarter windows
(extra-cab models) .......... 152
Back window
(vehicles with sliding
type) ................................ 153
1
For safety and security
2
Instrument cluster
3
Operation of
each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 2 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
3
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle .............156
Cargo and luggage ............170
Trailer towing .....................172
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch......183
Automatic transmission......187
Manual transmission..........191
Turn signal lever ................194
Parking brake.....................195
Horn ...................................196
4-3. Operating the lights
and wipers
Headlight switch ................ 197
Fog light switch ................. 201
Windshield wipers and
washer ............................ 204
Headlight cleaner switch ... 208
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap .................................. 209
4-5. Using the driving support
systems
Cruise control .................... 214
Rear view monitor
system............................. 219
Four-wheel drive system ... 226
Rear differential
lock system ..................... 230
Driving assist systems....... 233
DPF (Diesel Particulate
Filter) system .................. 238
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips.............. 243
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 3 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
5-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Boost ventilator system......250
Manual air conditioning
system .............................253
Automatic air conditioning
system .............................260
Power heater .....................267
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror
defoggers.........................268
5-2. Using the audio system
Audio system type............. 270
Using the radio .................. 272
Using the CD player .......... 276
Playing back MP3 and
WMA discs ...................... 281
Operating an iPod ............. 287
Operating a
USB memory................... 295
Optimal use of the
audio system................... 303
Using the AUX port ........... 306
Bluetooth
®
audio/phone .... 307
Using the Bluetooth
®
audio/phone .................... 312
Operating a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable
player .............................. 316
Making a phone call .......... 319
Using the “SETUP”
menu (“Bluetooth
*”
menu).............................. 324
Using the “SETUP” menu
(“TEL” or “PHONE”
menu).............................. 331
5-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list ................ 338
• Personal/interior light
main switch ................... 339
• Personal/interior
lights ............................. 339
• Interior light ................... 340
5
Interior features
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 4 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
5
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
5-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features ......341
• Glove box ......................343
• Console box ..................343
• Cup holders ...................344
• Bottle holders ................345
• Auxiliary boxes ..............346
Deck hooks ........................347
5-5. Other interior features
Sun visors and vanity
mirror ...............................348
Clock..................................349
Ashtray...............................350
Cigarette lighter .................351
Power outlet.......................352
Seat heaters ......................353
Compass............................355
Using the steering wheel
audio switches .................361
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior.......... 364
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior........... 368
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements ................... 371
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions ..................... 374
Hood.................................. 378
Engine compartment ......... 380
Tires .................................. 397
Tire inflation pressure........ 400
Wheels .............................. 402
Air conditioning filter.......... 404
Wireless remote
control battery ................. 406
Checking and
replacing fuses................ 409
Light bulbs......................... 423
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 5 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers ...........438
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an
emergency.......................439
7-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If your vehicle needs
to be towed ..................... 441
If you think something is
wrong .............................. 446
Fuel pump shut off
system............................. 447
If a warning light turns on
or a warning buzzer
sounds ............................ 448
If you have a flat tire.......... 456
If the engine will not
start ................................. 476
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P............. 477
If the vehicle battery is
discharged ...................... 478
If your vehicle overheats ... 482
If you run out of fuel
and the engine stalls
(diesel engine only)......... 485
If the vehicle becomes
stuck................................ 486
7
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 6 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
7
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.)...........490
Fuel information .................517
8-2. Initialization
Items to initialize ................520
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting) .....................522
Alphabetical index ......................526
8
Vehicle specifications
Index
For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation
system Owner’s manual” for information regarding the navigation
system.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 7 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
8
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For your information
Please note that this manual applies to all models and all equipment, includ-
ing options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not
installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we
reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ
from your vehicle in terms of equipment.
Both genuine Toyota and a wide variety of other spare parts and accessories
for Toyota vehicles are currently available on the market. Should it be deter-
mined that any of the genuine Toyota parts or accessories supplied with the
vehicle need to be replaced, Toyota recommends that genuine Toyota parts
or accessories, be used to replace them. Other parts or accessories of
matching quality can also be used. Toyota cannot accept any liability or guar-
antee spare parts and accessories which are not genuine Toyota products,
nor for replacement or installation involving such parts. In addition, damage
or performance problems resulting from the use of non-genuine Toyota spare
parts or accessories may not be covered under warranty.
Main Owner’s Manual
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 8 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
9
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
The installation of an RF-transmitter system in your vehicle could affect elec-
tronic systems such as:
● Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
● Cruise control system
● Anti-lock brake system
● SRS airbag system
● Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional for precautionary measures or spe-
cial instructions regarding installation of an RF-transmitter system.
Further information regarding frequency bands, power levels, antenna posi-
tions and installation provisions for the installation of RF-transmitters, is avail-
able on request at any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
Installation of an RF-transmitter system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 9 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
10
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain
explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt
pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be
sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner
removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional
before you scrap your vehicle.
Scrapping of your Toyota
Your vehicle contains batteries and/or accumulators. Do not discard them
into the environment but cooperate with separate collection
(Directive 2006/66/EC).
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 10 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
11
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influ-
ence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehi-
cle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and
reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other
drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that
distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or
reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
■ General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the cigarette lighter, the windows, or other features of the vehicle. In addi-
tion, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be
fatal to children.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 11 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
12
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Check the model code to see what type of model your vehicle is.
Basic code
TGN
∗6: Models with 2TR-FE engine
KUN
∗6: Models with 1KD-FTV engine
KUN
∗5: Models with 2KD-FTV engine
Driving system
2: 4WD models
3: Pre Runner (2WD models)
Cab type and Producing country
T: Single-cab made in South Africa
B: Single-cab made in Thailand
C: Extra-cab made in Thailand
P
*
1
: Double-cab made in South Africa
P
*
2
: Double-cab made in Thailand
D: Double-cab made in Thailand
*
1
: Destination W
*
2
: Destination Blank
Checking your vehicle’s model
K U N 2 6 – P A D W
1
32 4 65
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 12 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
13
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Transmission type
A: Automatic transmission
M:Manual transmission
Grade
D: DLX
S: SR
Destination
W: Models for European countries
H: Models only for Finland
Blank: Models for Kazakhstan etc.
The model code appears on the manufacturer’s label or plate with the head-
ing “MODEL”.
4
5
6
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 13 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
14
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
The label or plate is placed as shown in the following illustrations.
X Type A
X Type B
X Type C
The manufacturer’s label is located on the
left pillar.
The manufacturer’s label is located on the
left pillar.
The manufacturer’s plate is located beside
the engine compartment.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 14 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
15
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 15 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
16
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Reading this manual
CAUTION:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or
serious injury to people.
NOTICE:
Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to
or a malfunction in the vehicle or its equipment.
Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps
in numerical order.
Indicates the action (push-
ing, turning, etc.) used to
operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an
operation (e.g. a lid opens).
Indicates the component or
position being explained.
Means “Do not”, “Do not do
this”, or “Do not let this hap-
pen”.
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 16 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
17
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
How to search
■ Searching by name
• Alphabetical index ...... P. 526
■ Searching by installation
position
• Pictorial index............... P. 18
■ Searching by symptom or
sound
• What to do if...
(Troubleshooting) ....... P. 522
■ Searching by title
• Table of contents ............ P. 2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 17 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
18
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Pictorial index
■Exterior
X Single-cab models
Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 129
Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 129
Opening/closing the door glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 149
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 452
Back window (sliding type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 153
Tailgate
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 133
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 146
Adjusting the mirror angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 146
Folding the mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 147
Defogging the mirrors
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 268
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 18 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
19
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 204
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 243
Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 209
Refueling method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 209
Fuel type/fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 497
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 397
Tire size/inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 513
Winter tires/tire chain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 243
Checking/rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 397
Coping with flat tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 456
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 378
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 378
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 498
Coping with overheat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 482
Headlights/daytime running lights
*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
Front position lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
Front fog lights
*/rear fog light* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 201
Turn signal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 194
Stop/tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
License plate lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
Back-up lights
Shifting the shift lever to R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 187, 191
5
6
7
8
Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving
(Replacing method: P. 423, Watts: P. 516)
*: If equipped
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 19 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
20
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Extra-cab models
Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 129
Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 129
Opening/closing the door glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 149
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 452
Back window (sliding type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 153
Tailgate
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 133
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 146
Adjusting the mirror angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 146
Folding the mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 147
Defogging the mirrors
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 268
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 20 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
21
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 204
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 243
Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 209
Refueling method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 209
Fuel type/fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 497
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 397
Tire size/inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 513
Winter tires/tire chain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 243
Checking/rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 397
Coping with flat tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 456
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 378
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 378
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 498
Coping with overheat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 482
Camera
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 219
Headlights/daytime running lights
*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
Front position lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
Front fog lights
*/rear fog light* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 201
Turn signal lights
*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 194
Stop/tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
License plate lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
Back-up lights
Shifting the shift lever to R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 187, 191
5
6
7
8
9
Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving
(Replacing method: P. 423, Watts: P. 516)
*: If equipped
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 21 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
22
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Double-cab models
Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 129
Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 129
Opening/closing the door glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 149
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 452
Back window (sliding type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 153
Tailgate
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 133
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 146
Adjusting the mirror angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 146
Folding the mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 147
Defogging the mirrors
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 268
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 22 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
23
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 204
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 243
Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 209
Refueling method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 209
Fuel type/fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 497
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 397
Tire size/inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 513
Winter tires/tire chain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 243
Checking/rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 397
Coping with flat tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 456
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 378
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 378
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 498
Coping with overheat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 482
Camera
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 219
Headlights/daytime running lights
*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
Front position lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
Front fog lights
*/rear fog light* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 201
Turn signal lights
*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 194
Stop/tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
License plate lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
Back-up lights
Shifting the shift lever to R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 187, 191
5
6
7
8
9
Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving
(Replacing method: P. 423, Watts: P. 516)
*: If equipped
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 23 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
24
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■Instrument panel (Left-hand drive vehicles)
Engine switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 183
Starting the engine/changing the modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 183
Emergency stop of the engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 439
When the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 476
Shift lever (Automatic transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 187
Changing the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 187
Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 441
When the shift lever does not move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 477
Shift lever (Manual transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 191
Changing the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 191
Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 441
Front drive control lever
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 226
Selecting the transfer modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 226
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 24 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
25
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 100
Reading the meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 100
Adjusting the instrument panel light
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 102
Warning lights/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 94
When the warning lights come on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 448
Parking brake lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 195
Applying/releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 195
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 244
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 448
Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 194
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
Headlights/front position lights/tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
Fog lights
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 201
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 204
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 204
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 394
Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 378
Fuel filler door opener
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 211
Manual air conditioning system
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 253
Automatic air conditioning system
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 260
Audio system
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 270
AUX port/USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 287, 295, 306
Multimedia
*
1, 2
Rear view monitor system*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 219
Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 349
Multi-information display
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 104
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: Refer to “Navigation system Owner’s manual”.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 25 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
26
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■Switches (Left-hand drive vehicles)
Power window switches*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 149
Window lock switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 150
Door lock switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 130
Rear differential lock switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 230
Outside rear view mirror switches
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 146
Security indicator
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 85, 89
Headlight leveling dial
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 198
Rear fog light switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 202
Instrument panel light control knob
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 102
Headlight cleaner switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 208
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 26 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
27
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Audio remote control switches
*
1, 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 361
Cruise control switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 214
“DISP” button
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 105
Tilt steering lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 144
Telephone switches
*
1, 2
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: Refer to “Navigation system Owner’s manual”.
1
2
3
4
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 27 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
28
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 438
Rear window defogger switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 268
Power outlet
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 352
DPF system switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 238
Seat heater switches
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 353
VSC OFF switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 234
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 351
Power heater switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 267
AUX port/USB port
*
1, 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 28 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
29
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■Interior (Left-hand drive vehicles)
SRS airbags*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 51
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 42
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 136
Rear seats
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 139
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 141
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 46
Console box
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 343
Inside lock buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 130
Cup holders
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 344
Bottle holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 345
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 350
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: Refer to “Navigation system Owner’s manual”.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 29 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
30
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Cup holders
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 344
Auxiliary boxes
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 346
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 30 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
31
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 145
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 348
Vanity mirror
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 348
Personal/interior lights
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 339
Personal/interior light main switch
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 339
Auxiliary boxes
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 346
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 340
1
2
3
4
5
6
*: If equipped
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 31 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
32
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■Instrument panel (Right-hand drive vehicles)
Engine switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 183
Starting the engine/changing the modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 183
Emergency stop of the engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 439
When the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 476
Shift lever (Automatic transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 187
Changing the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 187
Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 441
When the shift lever does not move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 477
Shift lever (Manual transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 191
Changing the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 191
Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 441
Front drive control lever
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 226
Selecting the transfer modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 226
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 32 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
33
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 100
Reading the meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 100
Adjusting the instrument panel light
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 102
Warning lights/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 94
When the warning lights come on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 448
Parking brake lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 195
Applying/releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 195
Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 244
Warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 448
Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 194
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
Headlights/front position lights/tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 197
Fog lights
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 201
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 204
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 204
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 394
Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 378
Fuel filler door opener
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 211
Manual air conditioning system
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 253
Automatic air conditioning system
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 260
Audio system
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 270
AUX port/USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 287, 295, 306
Multimedia
*
1, 2
Rear view monitor system*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 219
Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 349
Multi-information display
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 104
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: Refer to “Navigation system Owner’s manual”.
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 33 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
34
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■Switches (Right-hand drive vehicles)
Security indicator*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 85, 89
Outside rear view mirror switches
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 146
Rear differential lock switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 230
Headlight cleaner switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 208
Instrument panel light control knob
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 102
Rear fog light switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 202
Headlight leveling dial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 198
Door lock switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 130
Window lock switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 150
Power window switches
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 149
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 34 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
35
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Audio remote control switches
*
1, 2
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 361
Cruise control switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 214
“DISP” button
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 105
Tilt steering lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 144
Telephone switches
*
1, 2
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: Refer to “Navigation system Owner’s manual”.
1
2
3
4
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 35 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
36
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 438
Rear window defogger switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 268
Power outlet
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 352
DPF system switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 238
VSC OFF switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 234
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 351
Power heater switch
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 267
AUX port/USB port
*
1, 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 36 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
37
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■Interior (Right-hand drive vehicles)
SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 51
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 42
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 136
Rear seats
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 139
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 141
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 46
Console box
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 343
Inside lock buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 130
Cup holders
*
1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 344
Bottle holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 345
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 350
*
1
: If equipped
*
2
: Refer to “Navigation system Owner’s manual”.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 37 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
38
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Cup holders
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 344
Auxiliary boxes
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 346
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 38 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
39
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 145
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 348
Vanity mirror
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 348
Personal/interior lights
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 339
Personal/interior light main switch
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 339
Auxiliary boxes
* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 346
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 340
1
2
3
4
5
6
*: If equipped
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 39 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
40
Pictorial index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 40 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
41
1
For safety and security
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
1-1. For safe use
Before driving.......................42
For safety drive ....................44
Seat belts.............................46
SRS airbags.........................51
Safety information
for children.........................63
Child restraint systems ........64
Installing child restraints ......75
Exhaust gas precautions .....84
1-2. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer
system ...............................85
Alarm ...................................89
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 41 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
42
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Before driving
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same
model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place
onto the carpet.
Insert the retaining hooks (clips)
into the floor mat eyelets.
Turn the upper knob of each
retaining hook (clip) to secure
the floor mats in place.
*: Always align the marks.
The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the
illustration.
Floor mat
1
*
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 42 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
43
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For safety and security
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering
with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may
become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to an accident, or leading to death
or a serious injury.
■ When installing the driver’s floor mat
● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year
vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.
● Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.
● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) pro-
vided.
● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■ Before driving
● Check that the floor mat is securely
fixed in the correct place with all the
provided retaining hooks (clips). Be
especially careful to perform this check
after cleaning the floor.
● With the engine stopped and the shift
lever in P (automatic transmission) or N
(manual transmission), fully depress
each pedal to the floor to make sure it
does not interfere with the floor mat.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 43 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
44
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For safety drive
Adjust the angle of the seat-
back so that you are sitting
straight up and so that you do
not have to lean forward to
steer. (→P. 136)
Adjust the seat so that you can
depress the pedals fully and so
that your arms bend slightly at
the elbow when gripping the
steering wheel. (→P. 136)
Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint
closest to the top of your ears. (→P. 141)
Wear the seat belt correctly. (→P. 4 6 )
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driv-
ing the vehicle. (→P. 4 6 )
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
(→P. 6 4)
For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate
position before driving.
Correct driving posture
1
2
Correct use of the seat belts
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 44 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
45
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For safety and security
Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside
and outside rear view mirrors properly. (→P. 145, 146)
Adjusting the mirrors
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.
● Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat
tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an acci-
dent and the adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
● When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to
feel tired.
Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to con-
tinue driving and take a break immediately.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 45 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
46
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Seat belts
◆ 3-point type
● Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not come
into contact with the neck or
slide off the shoulder.
● Position the lap belt as low
as possible over the hips.
● Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight and
well back in the seat.
● Do not twist the seat belt.
◆ 2-point type (if equipped)
● Position the lap belt as low
as possible over the hips and
remove excess length of the
belt.
● Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight and
well back in the seat.
● Do not twist the seat belt.
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before
driving the vehicle.
Correct use of the seat belts
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 46 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
47
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For safety and security
To fasten the seat belt, push the
plate into the buckle until a click
sound is heard.
To release the seat belt, press
the release button.
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor down while pressing the
release button.
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor up.
Move the height adjuster up and
down as needed until you hear a
click.
Lengthen
Shorten
Fastening and releasing the seat belt
Release button
1
2
Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (if equipped for
front seats)
Release button
1
2
Adjusting the length of the belt (2-point type seat belt) (if
equipped)
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 47 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
48
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
The pretensioners help the seat
belts to quickly restrain the occu-
pants by retracting the seat belts
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal col-
lision.
The pretensioners do not activate
in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a side impact, a rear
impact or a vehicle rollover.
■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR) (3-point type seat belt)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend so that you can move around fully.
■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult
size.
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (→ P. 64)
● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat
belt, follow the instructions regarding seat belt usage. (→P. 46)
■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated (if
equipped)
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for
the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■ Seat belt regulations
If seat belt regulations exist in the country where you reside, please contact
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional for seat belt replacement or installation.
Seat belt pretensioners (if equipped for front seats)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 48 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
49
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For safety and security
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt
for more than one person at once, including children.
● Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always
use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
● To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than
necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting
up straight and well back in the seats.
● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■ Pregnant women
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P. 46)
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (→P. 46)
Women who are pregnant should posi-
tion the lap belt as low as possible over
the hips in the same manner as other
occupants, extending the shoulder belt
completely over the shoulder and avoid-
ing belt contact with the rounding of the
abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not
only the pregnant woman, but also the
fetus could suffer death or serious injury
as a result of sudden braking or a colli-
sion.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 49 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
50
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■ Seat belt pretensioners (if equipped)
If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that
case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional.
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor (if equipped)
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your
shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off
your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an
accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or accident. (→P. 47)
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be
jammed in the door.
● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat
belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been
involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the
seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional. Inappropriate handling may lead to incorrect operation.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 50 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
51
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
SRS airbags
∗
◆ SRS front airbags
SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag (if equipped)
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front pas-
senger from impact with interior components
∗: If equipped
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain
types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the
occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce
the risk of death or serious injury.
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 51 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
52
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
◆ SRS side and curtain shield airbags
SRS side airbags (if equipped)
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants
SRS curtain shield airbags (if equipped)
Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer
seats
SRS airbag system components
2
3
Front impact sensors
Front passenger airbag
(if equipped)
Side impact sensors (front)
(if equipped)
Seat belt pretensioners and
force limiters (if equipped)
Side impact sensors (rear)
(if equipped)
Side airbags (if equipped)
Curtain shield airbags
(if equipped)
SRS warning light
Driver airbag
Airbag sensor assembly
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 52 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
53
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For safety and security
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The
SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. As
the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the
airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occu-
pants.
Bench type front seat: The SRS airbags are designed to protect the
driver and front outside passenger, and they are not designed to pro-
tect an occupant in the front center seating position.
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 50 - 75 mm (2 - 3 in.)
of inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10 in.) from your driver airbag pro-
vides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from
the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than
250 mm (10 in.) away now, you can change your driving position in sev-
eral ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the ped-
als comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 250 mm
(10 in.) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by
reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your
seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-
slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the air-
bag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended above, while still maintain-
ing control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instru-
ment panel controls.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 53 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
54
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Vehicles with SRS front passenger airbag: The SRS front passenger air-
bag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious
injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front
passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seat-
back adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
● Vehicles with SRS front passenger airbag: Improperly seated and/or
restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a
deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt
should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Toyota strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats (if
equipped) of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats (if
equipped) are safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat.
(→P. 64)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 54 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
55
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For safety and security
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Vehicles with SRS front passenger air-
bag: Do not sit on the edge of the seat
or lean against the dashboard.
● Vehicles with SRS front passenger air-
bag: Do not allow a child to stand in
front of the SRS front passenger airbag
unit or sit on the knees of a front pas-
senger.
● Vehicles with SRS front passenger air-
bag: Do not allow the front seat occu-
pants to hold items on their knees.
● Vehicles with SRS side and curtain
shield airbags: Do not lean against the
door, the roof side rail or the front, side
and rear pillars.
● Vehicles with SRS side and curtain
shield airbags: Do not allow anyone to
kneel on the passenger seat toward the
door or put their head or hands outside
the vehicle.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 55 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
56
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Vehicles with SRS side and curtain shield airbags: Do not hang coat hang-
ers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could
become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS
curtain shield airbags deploy.
● Vehicles with SRS side and curtain shield airbags: Do not use seat acces-
sories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they
may interfere with inflation of the SRS airbags. Such accessories may pre-
vent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause
the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not attach anything to or lean any-
thing against areas such as the dash-
board or steering wheel pad.
These items can become projectiles
when the SRS driver and front passen-
ger airbags (if equipped) deploy.
● Vehicles with SRS side and curtain
shield airbags: Do not attach anything
to areas such as a door, windshield
glass, side door glass, front or rear pil-
lar, roof side rail and assist grip.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 56 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
57
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For safety and security
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS air-
bag components.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS air-
bags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a
door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do
so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel
pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have
them replaced by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications
without consulting any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional. The SRS airbags may malfunction or
deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,
instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear
pillars or roof side rails
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the
occupant compartment
● Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows or
winches
● Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system
● Installation of electronic devices such as RF-transmitter and CD players
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 57 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
58
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying
(inflating) SRS airbag.
● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
● Vehicles without SRS curtain shield airbags: Parts of the airbag module
(steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the seats may be
hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
● Vehicles with SRS curtain shield airbags: Parts of the airbag module (steer-
ing wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the seats, parts of the
front and rear pillars, and roof side rails, may be hot for several minutes.
The airbag itself may also be hot.
● The windshield may crack.
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)
● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the
set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 20 -
30 km/h [12 - 18 mph] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or
deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle
strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle and sign pole, which can move
or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision
(e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under,
the bed of a truck etc.).
● Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pre-
tensioners will activate.
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side airbags and curtain shield
airbags)
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an
impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding
to the impact force produced by an approximately 1500 kg [3300 lb.] vehicle
colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle
orientation at an approximate speed of 20 - 30 km/h [12 - 18 mph]).
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 58 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
59
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For safety and security
■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than
a collision (SRS front airbags)
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the
underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front air-
bags)
The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is
involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-
speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient
forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may
occur.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or falling
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 59 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
60
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags
(SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the
vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision
to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed
to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or
if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.
● Collision from the side to the vehicle
body other than the passenger compart-
ment
● Collision from the side at an angle
● Collision from the front
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 60 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
61
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For safety and security
■ When to contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional
In the following cases, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional as soon as possible.
● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an acci-
dent that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS airbags to inflate.
● A portion of a door is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved in
an accident that was not severe enough
to cause the SRS side airbags and cur-
tain shield airbags to inflate.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 61 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
62
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
● The pad section of the steering wheel or
dashboard near the front passenger air-
bag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
● Vehicles with SRS side airbags: The sur-
face of the seats with the side airbag is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-
aged.
● Vehicles with SRS curtain shield air-
bags: The portion of the front pillars, rear
pillars or roof side rail garnishes (pad-
ding) containing the curtain shield air-
bags inside is scratched, cracked, or
otherwise damaged.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 62 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
63
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Safety information for children
● It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats (if equipped) to
avoid accidental contact with the shift lever, wiper switch etc.
● Use the rear door child-protector lock (double-cab models only) or
the window lock switch (vehicles with power windows) to avoid chil-
dren opening the door while driving or operating the power window
accidentally.
● Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or
pinch body parts, such as the power window (if equipped), hood,
tailgate (if equipped), seats etc.
Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehi-
cle.
Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the
child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat
belt.
CAUTION
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the windows or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or
extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 63 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
64
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Child restraint systems
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is
much safer than installing one on the front passenger seat.
● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appro-
priate to the age and size of the child.
● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child
restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
(→P. 7 5 )
● If child restraint system regulations exist in the country where you
reside, please contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional for the child
restraint system installation.
● Toyota recommends that you use a child restraint system which
conforms to the regulation ECE No.44.
Toyota strongly urges the use of child restraint systems.
Points to remember
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 64 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
65
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For safety and security
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 5 groups
according to the regulation ECE No.44:
Group 0: Up to 10 kg (22 lb.) (0 - 9 months)
Group 0+: Up to 13 kg (28 lb.) (0 - 2 years)
Group I: 9 to 18 kg (20 to 39 lb.) (9 months - 4 years)
Group II: 15 to 25 kg (34 to 55 lb.) (4 years - 7 years)
Group III: 22 to 36 kg (49 to 79 lb.) (6 years - 12 years)
In this owner’s manual, the following 3 types of popular child restraint
systems that can be secured with the seat belts are explained:
Types of child restraints
X Baby seat
Equal to Group 0 and 0+ of ECE
No.44
X Child seat
Equal to Group 0+ and I of ECE
No.44
X Junior seat
Equal to Group II and III of ECE
No.44
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 65 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
66
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Information provided in the table shows your child restraint system
suitability for various seating positions.
X Single-cab models
Child restraint system suitability for various seating positions
Front passenger seat
Separate seat
Bench seat
Outside
Center
With
airbag
Without
airbag
With
airbag
Without
airbag
0
Up to 10 kg
(22 lb.)
(0 - 9 months)
X
Never put
L1
X
Never put
L1 X
0+
Up to 13 kg
(28 lb.)
(0 - 2 years)
X
Never put
L1
X
Never put
L1 X
I
9 to 18 kg
(20 to 39 lb.)
(9 months -
4 years)
Rear-
facing
— X
Never put
Rear-
facing
— X
Rear-
facing
— X
Never put
Rear-
facing
— X
X
Forward-facing —
L2
II, III
15 to 36 kg
(34 to 79 lb.)
(4 - 12 years)
L3 X
Mass groups
Seating
position
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 66 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
67
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For safety and security
Key of letters inserted in the above table:
L1: Suitable for “TOYOTA BABY SAFE (up to 13 kg [28 lb.])”
approved for the use in this mass group.
L2: Suitable for “TOYOTA DUO+ (9 to 18 kg [20 to 39 lb.])” approved
for the use in this mass group.
L3: Suitable for “TOYOTA KID (15 to 36 kg [34 to 79 lb.])” approved
for the use in this mass group.
X: Not suitable seat position for children in this mass group.
The child restraint system mentioned in the table may not be available
outside of the EU area.
Other child restraint system which is different from the system men-
tioned in the table can be used, but the suitability of the systems must
be carefully checked with the child restraint system manufacturer con-
cerned and the seller of those seats.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 67 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
68
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Extra-cab models
Front passenger seat
Rear seat
With
airbag
Without
airbag
0
Up to 10 kg
(22 lb.)
(0 - 9 months)
X
Never put
L1 X
0+
Up to 13 kg
(28 lb.)
(0 - 2 years)
X
Never put
L1 X
I
9 to 18 kg
(20 to 39 lb.)
(9 months -
4 years)
Rear-facing
— X
Never put
Rear-facing
— X
X
Forward-facing —
L2
II, III
15 to 36 kg
(34 to 79 lb.)
(4 - 12 years)
L3 X
Mass groups
Seating
position
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 68 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
69
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For safety and security
Key of letters inserted in the above table:
L1: Suitable for “TOYOTA BABY SAFE (up to 13 kg [28 lb.])”
approved for the use in this mass group.
L2: Suitable for “TOYOTA DUO+ (9 to 18 kg [20 to 39 lb.])” approved
for the use in this mass group.
L3: Suitable for “TOYOTA KID (15 to 36 kg [34 to 79 lb.])” approved
for the use in this mass group.
X: Not suitable seat position for children in this mass group.
The child restraint system mentioned in the table may not be available
outside of the EU area.
Other child restraint system which is different from the system men-
tioned in the table can be used, but the suitability of the systems must
be carefully checked with the child restraint system manufacturer con-
cerned and the seller of those seats.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 69 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
70
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Double-cab models
Front passenger
seat
Rear seat
With
airbag
Without
airbag
Outside Center
0
Up to 10 kg
(22 lb.)
(0 - 9 months)
X
Never put
L1 U X
0+
Up to 13 kg
(28 lb.)
(0 - 2 years)
X
Never put
L1 U X
I
9 to 18 kg
(20 to 39 lb.)
(9 months -
4 years)
Rear-
facing — X
Never put
Rear-
facing — X
UUF
Forward-facing —
L2
II, III
15 to 36 kg
(34 to 79 lb.)
(4 - 12 years)
L3 U UF
Mass groups
Seating
position
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 70 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
71
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For safety and security
Key of letters inserted in the above table:
U: Suitable for “universal” category child restraint system approved
for the use in this mass group.
UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category child restraint sys-
tem approved for the use in this mass group.
L1: Suitable for “TOYOTA BABY SAFE (up to 13 kg [28 lb.])”
approved for the use in this mass group.
L2: Suitable for “TOYOTA DUO+ (9 to 18 kg [20 to 39 lb.])” approved
for the use in this mass group.
L3: Suitable for “TOYOTA KID (15 to 36 kg [34 to 79 lb.])” approved
for the use in this mass group.
X: Not suitable seat position for children in this mass group.
The child restraint system mentioned in the table may not be available
outside of the EU area.
Other child restraint system which is different from the system men-
tioned in the table can be used, but the suitability of the systems must
be carefully checked with the child restraint system manufacturer con-
cerned and the seller of those seats.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 71 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
72
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat
■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes
large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
● If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat
(if equipped) and use the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P. 46)
When you have to use a child restraint
system on the front passenger seat,
adjust the following:
● The seatback to the most upright posi-
tion
● Vehicles with seat position adjustment
lever: The seat cushion to the fully rear-
ward position
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 72 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
73
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For safety and security
CAUTION
■ Using a child restraint system
The use of a child restraint system not suitable for the vehicle may not prop-
erly secure the infant or child. It may result in death or serious injury (in the
event of sudden braking or an accident).
■ Child restraint precautions
● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child
must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system
depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is
not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be
crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.
● Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that con-
forms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to acci-
dent statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat
than in the front seat.
● Vehicles with SRS front passenger airbag: Never install a rear-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger seat.
In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front pas-
senger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-fac-
ing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front pas-
senger seat only when it is unavoidable. Adjust the seatback as upright as
possible and always move the seat as far back as possible because the
front passenger airbag (if equipped) could inflate with considerable speed
and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 73 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
74
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● Vehicles with SRS side and curtain shield airbags: Do not allow the child to
lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area
of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rails from which the SRS side
airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in
the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbags and cur-
tain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious
injury to the child.
● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by
the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If
it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child
in the event of a sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■ When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■ When the child restraint system is not in use
● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is
not in use. Do not store the child restraint system unsecured in the pas-
senger compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the
vehicle. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sud-
den braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 74 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
75
1-1. For safe use
1
For safety and security
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Installing child restraints
2-point type seat belt (if equipped)
3-point type seat belts (An ELR
belt requires a locking clip)
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions.
Firmly secure child restraints to the seats using a seat belt.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 75 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
76
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Forward-facing Child seat
Place the child restraint sys-
tem on the rear seat facing
the front of the vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
While pushing the child
restraint system down into
the seat, allow the belt to
tighten by pulling its free end
until the child restraint sys-
tem is securely in place.
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (2-point type seat belt)
(if equipped)
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 76 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
77
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For safety and security
■ Rear-facing Baby seat/child seat
Place the child restraint sys-
tem on the rear seat facing
the rear of the vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted. Keep the
lap portion of the belt tight.
Install a locking clip near the
plate of the lap and shoulder
belt by inserting the lap and
shoulder webbing through
the recesses of the locking
clip.
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (3-point type seat belt)
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 77 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
78
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Forward-facing Child seat
Place the child restraint sys-
tem on the seat facing the
front of the vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the
child restraint system and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted. Keep the
lap portion of the belt tight.
Install a locking clip near the
plate of the lap and shoulder
belt by inserting the lap and
shoulder webbing through
the recesses of the locking
clip.
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 78 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
79
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For safety and security
■ Junior seat
Place the child restraint sys-
tem on the seat facing the
front of the vehicle.
Sit the child in the child
restraint system. Fit the seat
belt to the child restraint sys-
tem according to the manu-
facturer’s instructions and
insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is
correctly positioned over the
child’s shoulder and that the lap
belt is as low as possible.
(→P. 46)
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 79 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
80
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
2-point type seat belt (if
equipped): Push the buckle
release button.
3-point type seat belt: Push the
buckle release button and fully
retract the seat belt.
■ When installing a child restraint system in the seat with ELR belt
You need a locking clip to install the child restraint system. Follow the instruc-
tions provided by the manufacturer of the system. If your child restraint sys-
tem does not provide a locking clip, you can purchase the following item from
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
Locking clip for child restraint system
(Part No. 73119-22010)
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 80 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
81
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For safety and security
CAUTION
■ When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual
and fix the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other
passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of a sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
● Double-cab models: If the driver’s seat
interferes with the child restraint system
and prevents it from being attached cor-
rectly, attach the child restraint system
to the right-hand rear seat (left-hand
drive vehicles) or the left-hand rear seat
(right-hand drive vehicles).
● Double-cab models: Adjust the front
passenger seat so that it does not inter-
fere with the child restraint system.
● Vehicles with SRS front passenger air-
bag: Only put a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front seat when
unavoidable. When installing a forward-
facing child restraint on the front pas-
senger seat, move the seat as far back
as possible (vehicles with seat position
adjustment lever). Failure to do so may
result in death or serious injury if the air-
bags deploy (inflate).
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 81 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
82
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ When installing a child restraint system
● Vehicles with SRS front passenger air-
bag: Never use a rear-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat.
The force of the rapid inflation of the
front passenger airbag can cause
death or serious injury to children in the
event of an accident.
● Extra-cab models: Do not install a child
restraint system on the rear seat. These
seats are not designed to hold a child
restraint system.
● Double-cab models: Do not install a
rear-facing child restraint system in the
rear center position. This seat position
is not designed to hold a rear-facing
child seat. Otherwise, the child or front
seat occupant(s) may be killed or seri-
ously injured in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an acci-
dent.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 82 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
83
1-1. For safe use
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For safety and security
CAUTION
■ When installing a child restraint system
● If child restraint system regulations exist in the country where you reside,
please contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional for the child restraint system installa-
tion.
● When a junior seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s
shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event
of a sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
● Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not
twisted.
● Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward
to ensure that it has been securely installed.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 83 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
84
1-1. For safe use
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Exhaust gas precautions
Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust
gases if inhale.
CAUTION
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to
an accident caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious
health hazard.
■ Important points while driving
If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle, open the windows and have the
vehicle inspected at any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional as soon as possible.
■ When parking
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a
garage, stop the engine.
● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space
and ensure that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it
is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is
running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.
■ Exhaust pipe
The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or
crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be
sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 84 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
85
1
1-2. Theft deterrent system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For safety and security
Engine immobilizer system
∗
The indicator light flashes after
the key has been removed from
the engine switch to indicate that
the system is operating.
The indicator light stops flashing
after the registered key has been
inserted into the engine switch to
indicate that the system has been
canceled.
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
● If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system
(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
∗: If equipped
The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent
the engine from starting if a key has not been previously regis-
tered in the vehicle’s on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehi-
cle.
This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not
guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 85 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
86
1-2. Theft deterrent system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Certification for the engine immobilizer system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 86 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
87
1-2. Theft deterrent system
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For safety and security
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 87 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
88
1-2. Theft deterrent system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
The DECLARATION of CONFORMITY (DoC) is available at the
following address:
http://www.tokai-rika.co.jp/pc/
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 88 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
89
1
1-2. Theft deterrent system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For safety and security
Alarm
∗
The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is
detected.
The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is
set:
● A locked door is opened in any way other than using the wireless
remote control.
● The hood is opened.
● Abnormal impact is detected when the impact sensor function is on.
Close the doors and hood, and
lock all the doors using the wire-
less remote control. The system
will be set automatically after 30
seconds.
The indicator light changes from
being on to flashing when the sys-
tem is set.
∗: If equipped
The alarm
Setting the alarm system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 89 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
90
1-2. Theft deterrent system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:
● Unlock the doors using the wireless remote control.
● Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position, or start the engine.
(The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.
■ Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of
the following:
● Nobody is in the vehicle.
● The windows are closed before the alarm is set.
● No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.
■ Impact sensor
The impact sensor can be canceled to prevent false alarms from being trig-
gered in case of the following conditions.
● When parking in the noisy area
● The vehicle body or glass is subjected to a strong impact from the outside
(such as in highly pressurized car wash)
● When transporting by a car carrier or ferry
Canceling the impact sensor, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
The impact sensor is deactivated as long as the system remains armed.
Deactivating or stopping the alarm
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 90 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
91
1-2. Theft deterrent system
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For safety and security
■ Triggering of the alarm
The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:
(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)
● The doors are unlocked using the key
and are opened.
● A person inside the vehicle opens a door
or hood.
● The battery is recharged or replaced
when the vehicle is locked.
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 91 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
92
1-2. Theft deterrent system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 92 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
93
2
Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
2. Instrument cluster
Warning lights
and indicators ....................94
Gauges and meters ...........100
Multi-information display....104
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 93 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
94
2. Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Warning lights and indicators
◆ Instrument cluster
X Non-optitron type meters
The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster and
center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s vari-
ous systems.
For the purpose of explanation, the following illustrations dis-
play all warning lights and indicators illuminated.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 94 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
95
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Optitron type meters
◆ Center panel
X Vehicles without
multi-information display
X Vehicles with multi-information
display
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 95 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
96
2. Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehi-
cle’s systems.
Warning lights
*
1
Brake system warning
light (→P. 448)
*
1
(if equipped)
Automatic transmission
fluid temperature
warning light (→P. 450)
*
1
Charging system
warning light (→P. 449)
*
1
(diesel engine)
Timing belt replacement
warning light (→P. 450)
*
1
Low engine oil pressure
warning light (→P. 449)
*
1
(diesel engine)
Fuel system warning
light (→P. 451)
*
1
Malfunction indicator
lamp (→P. 449)
*
1
(if equipped)
DPF system warning
light (→P. 451)
*
1
(if equipped)
SRS warning light
(→P. 449)
Open door warning light
(→P. 452)
*
1
(if equipped)
ABS warning light
(→P. 450)
Low fuel level warning
light (→P. 452)
*
1
(if equipped)
Slip indicator light
(→P. 450)
Driver’s seat belt
reminder light (→P. 452)
*
3
(if equipped)
Cruise control indicator
light (→P. 450)
Front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light
(→P. 452)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 96 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
97
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
*
1
: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position
to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after
the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction
in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have
the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
*
2
: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
*
3
: The light turns to yellow (except for Russia and Ukraine) or flashes (for
Russia and Ukraine) to indicate a malfunction.
(if equipped)
Unengaged “Park”
warning light (→P. 452)
*
1
(diesel engine)
Engine oil change
reminder light (→P. 453)
*
1
(diesel engine)
Low engine oil level
warning light (→P. 453)
*
2
(4WD models)
Four-wheel drive
indicator light (→P. 450)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 97 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
98
2. Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s
various systems.
Indicators
Turn signal indicator
(→P. 194)
*
1
(if equipped)
VSC OFF indicator
(→P. 234)
Headlight high beam
indicator (→P. 198)
*
1
(if equipped)
“TRC OFF” indicator
(→P. 234)
(if equipped)
Tail light indicator
(→P. 197)
(4WD models)
Four-wheel drive
indicator (→P. 226)
(if equipped)
Front fog light indicator
(→P. 201)
(if equipped)
Rear differential lock
indicator (→P. 230)
(if equipped)
Rear fog light indicator
(→P. 202)
(automatic
transmission)
Shift position indicators
(→P. 187)
*
1
(diesel engine)
Engine preheating
indicator (→P. 183)
(if equipped)
Cruise control indicator
(→P. 214)
*
1, 2
(if equipped)
Slip indicator (→P. 234)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 98 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
99
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
*
1
: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position
to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after
the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction
in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have
the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
*
2
: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
CAUTION
■ If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as ABS and the SRS warning light not
come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are
not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death
or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional
immediately if this occurs.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 99 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
100
2. Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Gauges and meters
X Non-Optitron type meters
X Optitron type meters
The units used on the speedometer may differ depending on the target
region.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 100 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
101
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
Odometer/trip meter display change button
→P. 102
Odometer and trip meter display
Odometer:
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter:
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last
reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different dis-
tances independently.
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
1
2
3
4
5
6
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 101 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
102
2. Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Switches between odometer and
trip meter displays. When the trip
meter is displayed, pressing and
holding the button will reset the
trip meter.
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted by turn-
ing the knob.
Darker
Brighter
Changing the display
Instrument panel light control (if equipped)
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 102 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
103
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ The meters illuminate when
X Vehicles with non-optitron type meters
The front position lights are turned on.
X Vehicles with optitron type meters
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■ The odometer and trip meter display illuminate when
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■ The brightness of the instrument panel lights
When the headlight switch is turned to on, the brightness will be reduced
slightly unless the control dial is turned fully clockwise.
■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The trip meter data will be reset.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which
indicates the maximum engine speed.
● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is
in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (→P. 482)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 103 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
104
2. Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Multi-information display
∗
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driv-
ing-related data including the current outside air temperature.
● Trip information (→P. 105)
Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruising-related infor-
mation.
● Clock (→P. 349)
∗: If equipped
Display contents
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 104 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
105
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Switching the display
“INFO.” or “DISP”
* button
Items displayed can be switched
by pressing the “INFO.” button
or “DISP” button.
The units may differ depending
on the target region.
“RESET” button
*: If equipped
Trip information
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 105 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
106
2. Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Outside temperature
■ Average fuel consumption
■ Current fuel consumption
■ Average vehicle speed
Displays the outside temperature.
The temperature range that can be displayed is
from -40°C (-40°F) to 50°C (122°F).
Displays the average fuel consumption since
the engine switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion.
• The function can be reset by pressing the
“RESET” button for longer than 1 second when
the average fuel consumption is displayed.
• Use the displayed average fuel consumption as
a reference.
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.
Displays the average vehicle speed since the
engine switch is turned to the “ON” position.
The function can be reset by pressing the
“RESET” button for longer than 1 second when
the average vehicle speed is displayed.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 106 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
107
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Elapsed time
■ Driving range
■ Compass (if equipped)
→P. 3 5 5
■ Display off
A blank screen is displayed.
Displays the elapsed time after the engine
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
• When the engine switch is turned on, time is
counted from 0:00. When the time exceeds
19:59, the counter returns to 0:00.
• The function can be reset by pressing the
“RESET” button for longer than 1 second when
the elapsed time is displayed.
Displays the estimated maximum distance that
can be driven with the quantity of fuel remain-
ing.
• This distance is computed based on your aver-
age fuel consumption. As a result, the actual
distance that can be driven may differ from that
displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to
the tank, the display may not be updated.
When refueling, turn the engine switch to the
“LOCK” position. If the vehicle is refueled with-
out turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” posi-
tion, the display may not updated.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 107 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
108
2. Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
The fuel consumption unit can be
changed.
Switch to the average fuel consumption or current fuel consumption
display.
Hold down the “INFO.” button until the unit flashes.
Push the “RESET” button to change the unit.
Push the “INFO.” button.
Setting up the display (if equipped)
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 108 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
109
2. Instrument cluster
2
Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Outside temperature display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be dis-
played, or the display may take longer than normal to change:
● When the vehicle is stopped, or moving at low speeds (less than 20 km/h
[12 mph])
● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/exit
of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
■ When “--” is displayed
The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The following information data and settings will be reset:
● Average fuel consumption
● Average vehicle speed
● Elapsed time
CAUTION
■ Cautions during setting up the display
As the engine needs to be operating during setting up the display, ensure
that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed
area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide
(CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious
health hazard.
NOTICE
■ The information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal
information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display
monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
■ During setting up the display
To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is operating while set-
ting up the display features.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 109 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
110
2. Instrument cluster
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 110 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
111
3
Operation of
each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
3-1. Key information
Keys...................................112
3-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors
Wireless remote control .....115
Side doors..........................129
Tailgate ..............................133
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Front seats.........................136
Rear seats .........................139
Head restraints ..................141
3-4. Adjusting the steering
wheel and mirrors
Steering wheel ...................144
Inside rear view mirror .......145
Outside rear view
mirrors .............................146
3-5. Opening and closing
the windows
Power windows..................149
Quarter windows
(extra-cab models)...........152
Back window
(vehicles with sliding
type).................................153
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 111 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
112
3-1. Key information
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
X Type A
Master keys
Valet key
Key number plate
X Type B
Master keys (with wireless
remote control function)
Operating the wireless remote con-
trol function (→P. 115)
Valet key
Key number plate
The keys
1
2
3
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 112 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
113
3-1. Key information
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Type C
Master keys
Valet key
Key number plate
X Type D
Master keys (with wireless
remote control function)
Operating the wireless remote con-
trol function (→P. 115)
Valet key
Key number plate
1
2
3
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 113 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
114
3-1. Key information
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant
Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (→P. 343)
Carry the master key for your own use and provide the attendant with the
valet key.
■ If you lose your keys
New genuine keys can be made by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer,
or another duly qualified and equipped professional using a master key and
the key number stamped on your key number plate. Keep the plate in a safe
place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.
■ When riding in an aircraft (type B and D)
When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft,
make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft
cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are
not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the key to
emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
● Do not subject the keys to strong shocks, expose them to high tempera-
tures by placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet.
● Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any mate-
rial that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.
● Do not disassemble the keys.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 114 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
115
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Wireless remote control
∗
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehi-
cle.
X Type A
Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely
locked.
Unlocks all the doors
X Type B
Locks all the doors
Check that the door is securely
locked.
Sounds the alarm
(press and hold) (→P. 119)
Unlocks all the doors
Pressing the button unlocks the
driver’s door. Pressing the button
again within 3 seconds unlocks the
other doors.
∗: If equipped
Function summary
1
2
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 115 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
116
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
The following functions can be set or canceled:
■ Before setting and canceling the functions
Remove the key from the engine switch and check that the alarm
system is disarmed.
Within 5 seconds, insert and remove the key twice in quick suc-
cession.
Wait for 5 seconds and within the next 5 seconds, push and hold
the lock and unlock buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds or
more. The turn signal lights will flash once indicating operation
success to this point.
Select the function you wish to set and follow the procedures below.
To cancel the operation, insert the key into the engine switch.
The optional functions (vehicles with alarm system)
Function Operation
Answerback function (on vehicles
with two batteries, the security horn
does not sound)
The answerback function can be
turned on or off. Locking or unlock-
ing is indicated by flashing the turn
signal lights and sounding of the
security horn, or flashing of the turn
signal lights only. The security horn
sounds if any door is not securely
closed.
Automatic locking and unlocking
function
All the doors will lock automatically
at 25 km/h (16 mph) or higher vehi-
cle speed.
When the engine switch is turned to
the “LOCK” position, all the doors
will be unlocked automatically.
(Even if the vehicle is subject to a
strong impact, all the doors will not
be unlocked automatically.)
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 116 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
117
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Setting and canceling the functions
● Answerback function
See “Before setting and canceling the functions”. (→P. 11 6 )
Within 5 seconds, push the lock button on the wireless remote
control key once. Within the next 2 seconds, push the unlock
button once. The turn signal lights will flash once.
Within 10 seconds, set the desired condition by pushing the
lock and unlock buttons according to the following table.
*: On vehicles with two batteries, the security horn does not sound.
1
2
3
Optional function condition Operation
Answerback
Open door
reminder
Step 1 Step 2
Settings
response
Turn signal
lights flash
Security horn
sounds
*
Push lock
button once
Push unlock
button once
within 2 sec-
onds
Turn signal
lights flash
once
Turn signal
lights flash
and security
horn sounds
*
Push lock
button twice
Turn signal
lights flash
twice
Off
Security horn
does not
sound
Push lock
button three
times
Turn signal
lights flash
three times
Cancel the settings
Push lock
button four or
more times
Not applicable
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 117 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
118
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
● Automatic locking and unlocking function
See “Before setting and canceling the functions”. (→P. 11 6 )
Within 5 seconds, push the lock button on the wireless remote
control key twice within 2 seconds. Within the next 2 seconds,
push the unlock button once. The turn signal lights will flash
twice.
Within 10 seconds, set the desired condition by pushing the
lock and unlock buttons according to the following table.
1
2
3
Automatic
locking/unlocking
function
Operation
Step 1 Step 2
Settings
response
On
Push lock button
once
Push unlock but-
ton once within 2
seconds
Turn signal lights
flash once
Off
Push lock button
twice
Turn signal lights
flash twice
Cancel the
settings
Push lock button
three or more
times
Not applicable
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 118 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
119
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Operation signals
The emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/
unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)
■ Door lock buzzer (some models of type B)
If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a
buzzer sounds for 1 second.
■ Panic mode (type B)
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■ Alarm (type B)
Using the wireless remote control to lock the doors will set the alarm system.
(→P. 89)
■ Conditions affecting operation
The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the follow-
ing situations:
● Near a TV tower, radio station, electric power plant, airport or other facility
that generates strong radio waves
● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless communi-
cation devices
● When multiple wireless keys are in the vicinity
● When the wireless key is in contact with, or is covered by a metallic object
● When a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
● When the wireless key has been left near an electrical appliance such as a
personal computer
■ Key battery depletion
If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be
depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (→P. 406)
When is pressed for longer than
about 1 second, an alarm will sound inter-
mittently and the vehicle lights will flash to
deter any person from trying to break into
or damage your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on the
wireless remote control.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 119 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
120
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Certification for wireless remote control
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 120 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
121
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 121 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
122
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
The DECLARATION of CONFORMITY (DoC) is available at the following
address:
http://www.tokai-rika.co.jp/pc/
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 122 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
123
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 123 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
124
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 124 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
125
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
The DECLARATION of CONFORMITY (DoC) is available at the following
address:
http://www.tokai-rika.co.jp/pc/
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 125 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
126
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 126 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
127
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 127 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
128
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
The DECLARATION of CONFORMITY (DoC) is available at the following
address:
http://www.tokai-rika.co.jp/pc/
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 128 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
129
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Side doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the wireless remote
control, key or door lock switch.
◆ Wireless remote control (if equipped)
→P. 11 5
◆ Key
Turning the key operates the doors as follows:
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
Unlocking and locking the doors
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 129 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
130
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
◆ Door lock switch (if equipped)
Locks all the doors
Unlocks all the doors
◆ Inside lock buttons
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The driver’s door can be opened
by pulling the inside handle
even if the lock button is in the
lock position.
Move the inside lock button to the lock position.
Close the door while pulling the door handle.
The door cannot be locked if the key is in the engine switch.
1
2
1
2
Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 130 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
131
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the lock is
set.
Unlock
Lock
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear doors.
Rear door child-protector lock (double-cab models only)
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 131 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
132
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
Be especially careful for the driver’s door, as the door may be opened
even if the inside lock button is in locked position.
● Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear
seats.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 132 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
133
3
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Tailgate
∗
Locks the tailgate
Unlocks the tailgate
X Type A
Unlock the latches and open the
tailgate slowly.
The support cables will hold the
tailgate horizontal.
After closing the tailgate, try pulling
it toward you to make sure it is
securely locked.
∗: If equipped
The tailgate can be locked/unlocked and opened by the follow-
ing procedures.
Locking and unlocking the tailgate (vehicles with key hole)
1
2
Opening the tailgate
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 133 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
134
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Type B
Pull the handle and open the tail-
gate slowly.
The support cables will hold the
tailgate horizontal.
After closing the tailgate, try pulling
it toward you to make sure it is
securely locked.
Release the brackets on the sup-
port cables from the lugs on both
sides as shown in the illustration.
Lowering the tailgate
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 134 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
135
3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
The rear step bumper is for rear end protection and easier step-up
loading.
Rear step bumper (if equipped)
X Type A X Type B
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not drive with the tailgate open.
● Do not get on the rear step bumper.
NOTICE
■ After closing the tailgate
Try pulling it toward you to make sure it is securely locked.
■ To prevent damage to the rear step bumper
Do not allow more than one person to get on the rear step bumper at a time.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 135 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
136
3-3. Adjusting the seats
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Front seats
X Manual seat (separated type)
Seat position adjustment lever
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
X Manual seat (bench type)
Seat position adjustment lever
(driver’s side only)
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Adjustment procedure
1
2
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 136 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
137
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Power seat (driver’s side only)
Seat position adjustment switch
Vertical height adjustment
switch
Seatback angle adjustment
switch
■ Getting in the vehicle
Pull the seatback angle adjust-
ment lever and fold down the
seatback. The seat will slide
forward.
Move the seat to the front-most
position
1
2
3
Moving a front passenger’s seat for rear seat access (extra-cab
models only)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 137 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
138
3-3. Adjusting the seats
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Getting out of the vehicle
Depress the release pedal and
fold down the seatback. The
seat will slide forward.
Move the seat to the front-most
position
Make sure that no passenger is
seated on the front passenger
seat before depressing the
release pedal.
■
After passengers have entered/exited the vehicle
Lift up the seatback and slide the seat backward until it locks.
CAUTION
■ When adjusting the seat position
● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passen-
gers are not injured by the moving seat.
● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid
injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
■ Seat adjustment
● To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not
recline the seat more than necessary.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply
restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of
an accident.
Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpect-
edly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Manual seat: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in
position.
■ Caution while driving
Extra-cab models only: Do not rest your foot on the release pedal behind
the passenger seat.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 138 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
139
3
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Rear seats
∗
Unhook the lock release lever.
Pull the seat cushions up and
then pull toward the front of
vehicle.
The seat cushions can be removed
separately.
Remove the center head
restraint. (if equipped)
Pull the strap and raise the bot-
tom cushion.
The latch under the bottom cush-
ion will release allowing the bottom
cushion to be raised.
∗: If equipped
Removing the rear seat cushions (if equipped for extra-cab mod-
els)
1
2
Raising the bottom cushion (double-cab models)
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 139 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
140
3-3. Adjusting the seats
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Anchor the strap to the bracket
behind the rear seat.
Replace the center head
restraint. (if equipped)
3
4
CAUTION
■ When removing the rear seat cushions (if equipped)
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
● Do not remove the rear seat cushions while driving.
● Be careful not to hit the removed rear seat cushions against a person or
drop it on yourself.
■ When reinstalling, returning the rear seat cushions, bottom cushion to
their original position
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
● Be careful not to get your hands or feet pinched in the seat.
● Make sure there are no obstacles under the seat which would prevent the
seat from properly locking into place.
● Make sure the rear seat cushions, bottom cushion securely locked by
pushing it upward and downward.
● Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 140 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
141
3
3-3. Adjusting the seats
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Head restraints
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button.
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock release button.
Front seats
Lock release button
1
2
Rear seats (double-cab models only)
Lock release button
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 141 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
142
3-3. Adjusting the seats
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Removing the head restraints
■ Installing the head restraints
■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints
■ Adjusting the rear seat head restraint (double-cab models only)
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when
using.
Pull the head restraint up while pressing
the lock release button.
Align the head restraint with the installa-
tion holes and push it down to the lock
position.
Press and hold the lock release button
when lowering the head restraint.
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
Lock release
button
Lock release
button
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 142 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
143
3-3. Adjusting the seats
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure
they are locked in position.
● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 143 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
144
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Steering wheel
Hold the steering wheel and
push the lever down.
Adjust to the ideal position by
moving the steering wheel.
After adjustment, pull the lever up
to secure the steering wheel.
Adjustment procedure
1
2
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an
accident, and resulting in death or serious injury.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 144 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
145
3
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Inside rear view mirror
The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving
posture.
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.
Reflected light from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced
by operating the lever.
Normal position
Anti-glare position
The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable suffi-
cient confirmation of the rear view.
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
Anti-glare function
1
2
CAUTION
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 145 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
146
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Outside rear view mirrors
X Manual adjustable type
Adjust a mirror.
X Power adjustable type
To select a mirror to adjust,
press the switch.
Left
Right
To adjust the mirror, press the
switch.
Up
Right
Down
Left
Adjustment procedure
1
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 146 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
147
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Manual folding type
Push the mirror back in the direc-
tion of the vehicle’s rear.
X Power folding type
Press the switch to fold the mir-
rors.
Press it again to extend them to
the original position.
■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when (power adjustable type)
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
■ When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror
defoggers)
Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (→P. 268)
Folding the mirrors
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 147 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
148
3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ Important points while driving
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an
accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded.
● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■ When a mirror is moving (power adjustable type)
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your
hand caught by the moving mirror.
■ When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with outside rear
view mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot
and burn you.
NOTICE
■ If ice should jam the mirror (vehicles with outside rear view mirror
defoggers)
Do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de-icer to
free the mirror.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 148 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
149
3
3-5. Opening and closing the windows
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Power windows
∗
The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.
Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:
X Type A
Closing
Opening
One-touch opening
*
(driver’s window only)
*: To stop the window partway,
operate the switch in the opposite
direction.
X Type B
Closing
Opening
One-touch opening
*
(driver’s window only)
One-touch closing
*
(driver’s window only)
*: To stop the window partway,
operate the switch in the opposite
direction.
∗: If equipped
Opening and closing procedures
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 149 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
150
3-5. Opening and closing the windows
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Press the switch down to lock the
passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent children
from accidentally opening or clos-
ing a passenger window.
■ The power windows can be operated when
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■ Jam protection function (only driver’s window for type B)
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, win-
dow travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■ If the battery is disconnected (only driver’s window for type B)
The jam protection function may not operate normally. The power window
must be initialized in order to ensure proper operation.
Open the window halfway.
Fully close the window by pulling the switch up and continue holding the
switch for 1 second.
Window lock switch
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 150 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
151
3-5. Opening and closing the windows
3
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ Closing the windows
● The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the
operation for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation,
especially by a child, do not let a child operate the power windows. It is
possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in
the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it is recommended to use
the window lock switch. (→P. 150)
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
● When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit
the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to
mischief, etc., that may possibly lead to an accident.
■ Jam protection function (only driver’s window for type B)
● Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the window fully closes.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 151 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
152
3-5. Opening and closing the windows
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Quarter windows (extra-cab models)
The quarter windows can be opened and closed using the latch han-
dle.
To open the quarter windows, pull
the latch handle toward you and
swing it fully out.
■ Closing the quarter windows
Make sure that the quarter windows are securely closed after closing them.
Opening and closing procedures
CAUTION
■ Opening or closing the quarter windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the quarter windows.
Closing a quarter window on someone can cause serious injury, and in
some instances, even death.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 152 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
153
3
3-5. Opening and closing the windows
Operation of each component
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Back window (vehicles with sliding type)
The back window can be opened and closed using the lock release
lever.
To open the back window, push
the lock release lever and slide
the back window.
■ Closing the back window
Make sure that the back window is securely closed after closing it.
Opening and closing procedures
CAUTION
■ Opening or closing the back window
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when the window is being operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the back window.
Closing the back window on someone can cause serious injury, and in
some instances, even death.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 153 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
154
3-5. Opening and closing the windows
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 154 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
155
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
4-1. Before driving
Driving the vehicle .............156
Cargo and luggage ............170
Trailer towing .....................172
4-2. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch......183
Automatic transmission .....187
Manual transmission..........191
Turn signal lever ................194
Parking brake ....................195
Horn...................................196
4-3. Operating the lights
and wipers
Headlight switch.................197
Fog light switch ..................201
Windshield wipers and
washer .............................204
Headlight cleaner switch....208
4-4. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank
cap...................................209
4-5. Using the driving support
systems
Cruise control.....................214
Rear view monitor
system .............................219
Four-wheel drive system....226
Rear differential
lock system......................230
Driving assist systems .......233
DPF (Diesel Particulate
Filter) system ...................238
4-6. Driving tips
Winter driving tips ..............243
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 155 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
156
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Driving the vehicle
→P. 1 8 3
X Automatic transmission
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (→P. 187)
Release the parking brake. (→P. 195)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelera-
tor pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
X Manual transmission
While depressing the clutch pedal, shift the shift lever to 1.
(→P. 191)
Release the parking brake. (→P. 195)
Gradually release the clutch pedal. At the same time, gently
depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe
driving:
Starting the engine
Driving
1
2
3
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 156 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
157
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Automatic transmission
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift
lever to P or N. (→P. 187)
X Manual transmission
While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift
lever to N. (→P. 191)
X Automatic transmission
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
Set the parking brake. (→P. 195)
Shift the shift lever to P. (→P. 187)
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
Stopping
Parking the vehicle
1
2
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 157 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
158
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Manual transmission
While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake pedal.
Set the parking brake. (→P. 195)
Shift the shift lever to N. (→P. 191)
If parking on a hill, shift the shift lever to 1 or R as needed.
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position to stop the engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.
If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.
X Automatic transmission
Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
X Manual transmission
With the parking brake firmly set and the clutch pedal fully
depressed, shift the shift lever to 1.
Lightly depress the accelerator pedal at the same time as gradually
releasing the clutch pedal.
Release the parking brake.
Starting off on a steep uphill
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 158 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
159
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the win-
dows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be espe-
cially slippery.
● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,
because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road sur-
face, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
■ Engine speed while driving (automatic transmission)
In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving.
This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to
meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.
● The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
● When the accelerator pedal is released
■ Breaking in your new Toyota
To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recom-
mended:
● For the first 300 km (200 miles):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 800 km (500 miles):
Do not tow a trailer.
● For the first 1000 km (600 miles):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in the low gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
• Do not drive slowly with the manual transmission in a high gear.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 159 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
160
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Idling time before stopping the engine (diesel engine)
To prevent damage to the turbocharger, allow the engine to idle immediately
after high-speed driving or driving up a hill.
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability
of the correct fuel. (→P. 497)
Driving condition Idling time
Normal city driving Not necessary
High-speed driving
Constant speed of approx.
80 km/h (50 mph)
Approximately
20 seconds
Constant speed of approx.
100 km/h (62 mph)
Approximately
1 minute
Steep hill driving or continuous driving at 100 km/h
(62 mph) or more (race track driving etc.)
Approximately
2 minutes
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 160 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
161
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When starting the vehicle
On vehicles with automatic transmission, always keep your foot on the
brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This prevents the vehi-
cle from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accel-
erator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake
pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a diffi-
culty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the
vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelera-
tor pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake
pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, result-
ing in an accident.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot
parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 161 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
162
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When driving the vehicle
● During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off
while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the
power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to
steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible
to stop the vehicle in the normal way: →P. 439
● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving
down a steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose
effectiveness. (→P. 188)
● Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or
outside rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.
● Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body
are not outside the vehicle.
● On vehicles with manual transmission, do not operate the clutch halfway
for a long period of time unless it is necessary. Doing so could not only
speed up clutch wear, but could also damage the clutch or even cause a
fatal accident such as vehicle fire.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 162 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
163
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and
reduce your ability to control the vehicle.
● Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine
speed could cause the vehicle to skid.
● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make
sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent
the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet
and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected.
■ When shifting the shift lever
● On vehicles with automatic transmission, do not let the vehicle roll back-
wards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the
shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering
performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
● On vehicles with automatic transmission, do not shift the shift lever to P
while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to D (vehicles with automatic transmission) or 1
(vehicles with manual transmission) while the vehicle is moving backward.
Doing so can damage to the transmission and may result in a loss of vehi-
cle control.
● Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the
engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is
selected.
● On vehicles with automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the shift
lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the shift lever to a
gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the
vehicle that may cause an accident.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 163 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
164
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear indicators)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional as
soon as possible.
Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads
and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P (vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion only) or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly,
causing an accident.
● On vehicles with automatic transmission, in order to prevent accidents due
to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while
the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.
● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused
by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal
and securely apply the parking brake as needed.
● Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause
the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible
material is nearby.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 164 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
165
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in
the vehicle when it is in the sun.
Doing so may result in the following:
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a
fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and
plastic material of glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the
interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s
electrical components.
● Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a
place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when
luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.
● Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place
containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard.
Adhesive discs or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehi-
cle.
● Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a
metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause
the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.
● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P (vehicles with
automatic transmission only), stop the engine and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately
after turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 165 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
166
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift
lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire
due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly
ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to
death or a serious health hazard.
■ When braking
● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause
one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the
parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.
● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other
vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking. In this
case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.
● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted
brakes.
● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: If one of the
systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will
increase.
Have your brakes fixed immediately.
■ If the vehicle becomes stuck (4WD models)
Do not spin the wheels excessively when any of the tires is up in the air, or
the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may damage the driveline com-
ponents or propel the vehicle forward or backward, causing an accident.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 166 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
167
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during
driving, as this may restrain driving torque.
● On vehicles with automatic transmission, do not use the accelerator pedal
or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time to hold the
vehicle on a hill.
● On vehicles with manual transmission, do not shift gears unless the clutch
pedal is fully depressed. After shifting, do not release the clutch pedal
abruptly. Doing so may damage the clutch, transmission and gears.
● On vehicles with manual transmission, observe the following to prevent
the clutch from being damaged.
• Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving.
Doing so may cause clutch trouble.
• Do not use any gear other than the 1st gear when starting off and mov-
ing forward.
Doing so may damage the clutch.
• Do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle when stopping on an uphill
grade.
Doing so may damage the clutch.
● On vehicles with manual transmission, do not shift the shift lever to R
when the vehicle is still moving. Doing so may damage the clutch, trans-
mission and gears.
● On vehicles with manual transmission, if you cannot accelerate the vehicle
even when the clutch is engaged and the accelerator pedal is depressed,
this may mean that the clutch is slipping, and the vehicle may be rendered
undriveable. Have any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional inspect the vehicle as soon as
possible.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 167 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
168
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ When parking the vehicle
On vehicles with automatic transmission, always shift the shift lever to P.
Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may acceler-
ate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for
an extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering pump.
● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid
damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
● For diesel engine: Make sure to idle the engine immediately after high-
speed driving or hill climbing. Stop the engine only after the turbocharger
has cooled down.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the turbocharger.
■ If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehi-
cle.
● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.
● The vehicle will lean abnormally.
Information on what to do in case of a flat tire. (→P. 456)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 168 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
169
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may
cause the following serious damage to the vehicle:
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be
sure to have any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-
fied and equipped professional check the following:
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, trans-
mission, transfer (4WD models), differential, etc.
● Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints
(where possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 169 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
170
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Cargo and luggage
Take notice of the following information about storage precau-
tions, cargo capacity and load.
CAUTION
■ Things that must not be carried in the rear deck
The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the rear deck:
● Receptacles containing gasoline
● Aerosol cans
■ Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly,
may block the driver’s vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or pas-
sengers, possibly causing an accident.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the rear deck whenever possible.
● Except for single-cab models: Do not stack anything behind the front seats
higher than the seatbacks.
● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.
• At the feet of the driver
• On the front passenger seats (when stacking items)
• Except for single-cab models: On the rear seat (when stacking items)
• On the instrument panel
• On the dashboard
● Secure all items in the occupant compartment.
● Never allow anyone to ride in the rear deck. It is not designed for passen-
gers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened.
Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or serious bodily
injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 170 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
171
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ Load and distribution
● Do not overload your vehicle.
● Do not apply loads unevenly.
Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control
which may cause death or serious injury.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 171 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
172
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Trailer towing
∗
◆ Weight limits
Check the allowable towing capacity, GVM (Gross Vehicle Mass),
MPAC (Maximum Permissible Axle Capacity), and permissible
draw bar load before towing. (→P. 491)
◆ Towing hitch/bracket
Toyota recommends the use of the Toyota hitch/bracket for your
vehicle. Other products of a suitable nature and comparable quality
may also be used.
∗: Except for Kazakhstan
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load-car-
rying vehicle. Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on han-
dling, performance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption.
Your safety and satisfaction depend on the proper use of correct
equipment and cautious driving habits. For your safety and the
safety of others, do not overload the vehicle or trailer.
To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in
accordance with the trailer’s characteristics and operating con-
ditions.
Toyota warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction
caused by towing a trailer for commercial purposes.
Ask your local authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional for further details
before towing, as there are additional legal requirements in
some countries.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 172 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
173
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Total trailer weight and permissible drawbar load
Total trailer weight
Weight of the trailer itself plus
the trailer load should be within
the maximum towing capacity.
Exceeding this weight is danger-
ous. (→P. 491)
When towing a trailer, use a fric-
tion coupler or friction stabilizer
(sway control device).
When the total trailer weight is over 2000 kg (4409 lb.), a friction stabi-
lizer (sway control device) is required.
Permissible drawbar load
Allocate the trailer load so that the drawbar load is greater than 25 kg
(55.1 lb.) or 4% of the towing capacity. Do not let the drawbar load
exceed the indicated weight. (→P. 491)
Important points regarding trailer loads
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 173 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
174
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Information tag (manufacturer’s label)
Gross vehicle mass
The combined weight of the driver, passengers, cargo, towing
hitch, total curb mass and drawbar load must not exceed the
gross vehicle mass. Exceeding this weight is dangerous.
Maximum permissible rear axle capacity
The weight borne by the rear axle should not exceed the maxi-
mum permissible rear axle capacity. Exceeding this weight is
dangerous.
The values for towing capacity were derived from testing con-
ducted at sea level. Take note that engine output and towing
capacity will be reduced at high altitudes.
1
2
X Type A X Type B
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 174 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
175
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Vehicles with flat bumper or without bumper
70 mm (2.8 in.)
70 mm (2.8 in.)
75 mm (3.0 in.)
20 mm (0.8 in.)
Single-cab models:
355 mm (14.0 in.)
Extra-cab models:
320 mm (12.6 in.)
Double-cab models:
330 mm (13.0 in.)
195 mm (7.7 in.)
1355 mm (53.3 in.)
*: Except for KUN25L-PRMDH model (The model code is indicated on the
manufacturer’s label or plate. [→P. 494])
Installation positions for the towing hitch/bracket and hitch ball*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 175 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
176
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Vehicles with step bumper
70 mm (2.8 in.)
70 mm (2.8 in.)
20 mm (0.8 in.)
35 mm (1.4 in.)
Single-cab models:
360 mm (14.2 in.)
Extra-cab models:
325 mm (12.8 in.)
Double-cab models:
335 mm (13.2 in.)
195 mm (7.7 in.)
1375 mm (54.1 in.)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 176 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
177
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Tire information
● Increase the tire inflation pressure to 20.0 kPa (0.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 3 psi)
greater than the recommended value when towing. (→P. 513)
● Increase the air pressure of the trailer tires in accordance with the total
trailer weight and according to the values recommended by the manufac-
turer of your trailer.
■ Trailer lights
Check that the turn signal lights and stoplights are operating correctly every
time you hitch up the trailer. Directly wiring up to your vehicle may damage
the electrical system and stop the lights from functioning correctly.
■ Break-in schedule
Toyota recommends that vehicles fitted with new power train components
should not be used for towing trailers for the first 800 km (500 miles).
■ Safety checks before towing
● Check that the maximum load limit for the towing hitch/bracket and hitch ball
is not exceeded. Bear in mind that the coupling weight of the trailer will add
to the load exerted on the vehicle. Also make sure that the total load exerted
on the vehicle is within the range of the weight limits. (→P. 173)
● Ensure that the trailer load is secure.
● Supplementary outside rear view mirrors should be added to the vehicle if
the traffic behind cannot be clearly seen with standard mirrors. Adjust the
extending arms of these mirrors on both sides of the vehicle so that they
always provide maximum visibility of the road behind.
● The trailer ball is set up at the proper height for the coupler on the trailer. (for
KUN25L-PRMDH model
*)
*: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label or plate.
(→P. 494)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 177 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
178
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Maintenance
● Maintenance must be performed more frequently when using the vehicle for
towing due to the greater weight burden placed on the vehicle compared to
normal driving.
● Retighten all bolts securing the hitching ball and bracket after towing for
approximately 1000 km (600 miles).
NOTICE
■ When the rear bumper strengthening material is aluminum
Ensure the steel bracket part does not come directly in contact with that
area.
When steel and aluminum come into contact, there is a reaction similar to
corrosion, which will weaken the section concerned and may result in dam-
age. Apply a rust inhibitor to parts that will come in contact when attaching a
steel bracket.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 178 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
179
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. In order to
avoid accident death or serious injury, keep the following in mind
when towing:
■ Checking connections between trailer and lights
Stop the vehicle and check the operation of the connection between
the trailer and lights after driving for a brief period as well as before
starting off.
■ Practicing driving with a coupled trailer
● Get the feel for turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer
coupled by practicing in an area with no or light traffic.
● When reversing with a coupled trailer, hold the section of the
steering wheel nearest to you and rotate clockwise to turn the
trailer left or counterclockwise to turn it right. Always rotate a little
at a time to prevent steering error. Have someone guide you
when reversing to lessen the risk of accident.
■ Increasing vehicle-to-vehicle distance
At a speed of 10 km/h (6 mph), the distance to the vehicle running
ahead of you should be equivalent to or greater than the combined
length of your vehicle and trailer. Avoid sudden braking that may
cause skidding. Otherwise, the vehicle may spin out of control. This
is especially true when driving on wet or slippery road surfaces.
Guidance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 179 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
180
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Sudden acceleration/steering input/cornering
Executing sharp turns when towing may result in the trailer colliding
with your vehicle. Decelerate well in advance when approaching
turns and take them slowly and carefully to avoid sudden braking.
■ Important points regarding turning
The wheels of the trailer will travel closer to the inside of the curve
than the wheels of the vehicle. To make allowance for this, take the
turns wider than you would normally do.
■ Important points regarding stability
Vehicle movement resulting from uneven road surfaces and strong
crosswinds will affect handling. The vehicle may also be rocked by
passing buses or large trucks. Frequently check behind when mov-
ing alongside such vehicles. As soon as such vehicle movement
occurs, immediately start to decelerate smoothly by slowly applying
the brakes. Always steer the vehicle straight ahead while braking.
■ Passing other vehicles
Consider the total combined length of your vehicle and trailer and
ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is sufficient before exe-
cuting lane changes.
■ Transmission information
To maintain engine braking efficiency when using engine braking,
do not use the transmission in D (automatic transmission) or in the
5th gear (manual transmission). (→P. 187, 191)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 180 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
181
4-1. Before driving
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
If the engine overheats
Towing a loaded trailer up a long, steep incline in temperatures
exceeding 30°C (85°F) may result in the engine overheating. If the
engine coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is over-
heating, turn the air conditioning off immediately, leave the road and
stop the vehicle in a safe place. (→P. 482)
■ When parking the vehicle
Always place wheel chocks under the wheels of both the vehicle
and trailer. Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P
for automatic transmissions, and 1 or R for manual transmissions.
CAUTION
Follow all the instructions described in this section. Failure to do so could
cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Trailer towing precautions
When towing, make sure that none of the weight limits are exceeded.
(→P. 173)
■ Vehicle speed in towing
Observe the legal maximum speeds for trailer towing.
■ Before descending hills or long declines
Reduce speed and downshift. However, never downshift suddenly while
descending steep or long down hill grades.
■ Operation of the brake pedal
Do not hold the brake pedal depressed often or for long periods of time.
Doing so may result in the brake overheating or reduce braking effects.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 181 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
182
4-1. Before driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ To avoid accident or injury
The gross combination mass (sum of your vehicle mass plus its load and
the total trailer mass) must not exceed the following:
X Single-cab models
5140 kg (11332 lb.)
X Extra-cab models
5120 kg (11288 lb.): 4WD models
5090 kg (11222 lb.): Pre Runner
X Double-cab models
5230 kg (11530 lb.): 1KD-FTV engine
5190 kg (11442 lb.): 2KD-FTV engine, 4WD models
5100 kg (11244 lb.): 2KD-FTV engine, Pre Runner
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 182 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
183
4
4-2. Driving procedures
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Engine (ignition) switch
X Automatic transmission (diesel engine)
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position.
The indicator turns on.
After the indicator light goes out, turn the engine switch to the
“START” position to start the engine.
X Manual transmission (gasoline engine)
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in N.
Firmly depress the clutch pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “START” position to start the engine.
X Manual transmission (diesel engine)
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in N.
Firmly depress the clutch pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “ON” position.
The indicator turns on.
After the indicator light goes out, turn the engine switch to the
“START” position to start the engine.
Starting the engine
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 183 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
184
4-2. Driving procedures
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
“LOCK”
The steering wheel is locked and
the key can be removed. (Vehicles
with automatic transmission: The
key can be removed only when the
shift lever is in P.)
“ACC”
Some electrical components such
as the audio system can be used.
“ON”
All electrical components can be
used.
“START”
For starting the engine.
Changing the engine switch positions
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 184 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
185
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Turning the key from “ACC” to “LOCK”
Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or N (manual transmis-
sion). (→P. 187, 191)
■ If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 85)
Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional.
■ When the steering lock cannot be released
■ Key reminder function
A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the engine switch is in
the “LOCK” or “ACC” position to remind you to remove the key.
Push in the key and turn it to the
“LOCK” position.
When starting the engine, the engine
switch may seem stuck in the “LOCK”
position. To free it, turn the key while turn-
ing the steering wheel slightly left and
right.
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 185 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
186
4-2. Driving procedures
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Caution when driving
Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position while driving.
If in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving,
turn the engine switch only to the “ACC” position to stop the engine. An
accident may result if the engine is stopped while driving.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the engine switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position for long peri-
ods of time without the engine running.
■ When starting the engine
● Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may
overheat the starter and wiring system.
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehi-
cle checked by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional immediately.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 186 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
187
4
4-2. Driving procedures
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Automatic transmission
∗
While the engine switch is in the “ON” position, move the shift
lever with the brake pedal depressed.
When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the
vehicle is completely stopped.
∗: If equipped
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
Shifting the shift lever
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 187 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
188
4-2. Driving procedures
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
*: To improve fuel efficiency and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the D
position for normal driving.
Shift position purpose
Shift position Function
P Parking the vehicle/starting the engine
R Reversing
N
Neutral
(Condition in which the power is not transmitted)
D Normal driving*
4 Position for engine braking
3
Position for more powerful engine braking
2
L Position for maximum engine braking
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 188 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
189
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Downshift restriction
The maximum allowable speeds are as follows.
■ AI-SHIFT
AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver perfor-
mance and driving conditions.
AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position.
■ When driving with cruise control activated (if equipped)
Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine
braking, engine braking will not activate while downshifting to 4 because
cruise control will not be canceled. (→P. 214)
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
→P. 477
Downshifting
Maximum speed
km/h (mph)
Front drive control lever
in H2 or H4
Front drive control lever
in L4
D → 4 140 (86) -
4 → 3 100 (62) 35 (21)
3 → 2 65 (40) 25 (15)
2 → L 20 (12) 5 (3)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 189 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
190
4-2. Driving procedures
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly.
Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid,
resulting in an accident.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 190 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
191
4
4-2. Driving procedures
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Manual transmission
∗
Fully depress the clutch pedal
before operating the shift lever,
and then release it slowly.
If it is difficult to shift in reverse,
shift the shift lever to N, release the
clutch pedal momentarily, and then
try again.
∗: If equipped
Shifting the shift lever
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 191 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
192
4-2. Driving procedures
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Maximum downshifting speeds
Observe the downshifting speeds in the following table to prevent over-rev-
ving the engine.
X 4WD models (front drive control lever in H2 or H4)
*
1
: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label or plate.
(→P. 494)
*
2
: With 265/65R17 tires
*
3
: With 225/70R17C tires
*
4
: With 255/70R15C tires
*
5
: Except for Kazakhstan
*
6
: For Kazakhstan
*
7
: With 205R16C tires
Maximum speed
km/h (mph)
Shift position 1 2 3 4
1KD-FTV engine 39 (24)
73 (45)*
2
72 (45)*
3
119 (74)*
2
116 (72)*
3
170 (106)
*
2
167 (104)
*
3
2KD-FTV
engine
For
KUN25L-
PRMDH
model
*
1
35 (22) 65 (40) 105 (65)
150 (93)
*
5
151 (94)
*
6
For Russia
and Ukraine
36 (22)*
2, 3
35 (22)*
4, 7
67 (42)*
2
66 (41)*
3
65 (40)*
4, 7
109 (68)
*
2
107 (66)
*
3
105 (65)
*
4, 7
156 (97)
*
2
153 (95)
*
3
151 (94)
*
4, 7
Except for
Russia,
Ukraine and
KUN25L-
PRMDH
models
*
1
38 (24)*
2
37 (23)
*
3, 4, 7
70 (43)*
2
69 (43)*
3
68 (42)*
4, 7
114 (71)
*
2
112 (70)
*
3
110 (68)
*
4, 7
164 (102)
*
2
161 (100)
*
3
158 (98)
*
4, 7
2TR-FE engine 43 (27) 80 (50) 115 (71) 165 (103)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 192 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
193
4-2. Driving procedures
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X 4WD models (front drive control lever in L4)
*
1
: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label or plate.
(→P. 494)
*
2
: With 265/65R17 tires
*
3
: With 225/70R17C tires
*
4
: With 255/70R15C tires
*
5
: With 205R16C tires
X Pre Runner
Maximum speed
km/h (mph)
Shift position 1 2 3 4
1KD-FTV engine 15 (9)
29 (18)*
2
28 (17)*
3
46 (29)*
2
45 (28)*
3
67 (42)*
2
65 (40)*
3
2KD-FTV
engine
For
KUN25L-
PRMDH
model
*
1
14 (9) 25 (16) 41 (25) 59 (37)
For Russia
and Ukraine
14 (9)
26 (16)*
2, 3
25 (16)*
4, 5
42 (26)*
2, 3
41 (25)*
4, 5
61 (38)*
2
60 (37)*
3
59 (37)*
4, 5
Except for
Russia,
Ukraine and
KUN25L-
PRMDH
models
*
1
15 (9)*
2, 3
14 (9)*
4, 5
27 (17)
*
2, 3, 4
26 (16)*
5
45 (28)*
2
44 (27)*
3
43 (27)*
4, 5
64 (40)*
2
63 (39)*
3
62 (39)*
4, 5
2TR-FE engine 17 (11) 31 (19) 45 (28) 64 (40)
Maximum speed
km/h (mph)
Shift position 1 2 3 4
With 265/65R17 tires 38 (24) 70 (43) 114 (71) 164 (102)
With 225/70R17C tires 37 (23) 69 (43) 112 (70) 161 (100)
With 255/70R15C and
205R16C tires
37 (23) 68 (42) 110 (68) 158 (98)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 193 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
194
4-2. Driving procedures
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Turn signal lever
Right turn
Left turn
Lane change to the right (push
and hold the lever partway)
The right hand signals will flash
until you release the lever.
Lane change to the left (push
and hold the lever partway)
The left hand signals will flash until
you release the lever.
■ Turn signals can be operated when
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■ If the indicator flashes faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned
out.
Operating instructions
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 194 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
195
4
4-2. Driving procedures
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Parking brake
Sets the parking brake
Fully pull the parking brake while
depressing the brake pedal.
At this time, the brake system
warning light will come on.
Releases the parking brake
Slightly raise the lever and lower it
completely while pressing the but-
ton.
At this time, the brake system
warning light will go off.
■ Usage in winter time
→P. 244
1
2
NOTICE
■ Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components
overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake
wear.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 195 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
196
4-2. Driving procedures
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Horn
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the mark.
■ After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.
(→P. 144)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 196 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
197
4
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Headlight switch
Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
Operating instructions
*
Off
The headlights, front
position, tail, license
plate and instrument
panel lights turn on and
off automatically (when
the engine switch is in
the “ON” position).
The front position, tail,
license plate and instru-
ment panel lights turn
on.
The headlights and all
lights listed above turn
on.
*: Vehicles with optitron type meters
only
1
2
3
4
(if equipped)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 197 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
198
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
With the headlights on, push
the lever away from you to turn
on the high beams.
Pull the lever toward you to the
center position to turn the high
beams off.
Pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the high
beams once.
You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.
The level of the headlights can be adjusted according to the number
of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle.
Raises the level of the head-
lights
Lowers the level of the head-
lights
Turning on the high beam headlights
1
2
Manual headlight leveling dial (if equipped)
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 198 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
199
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Guide to dial settings
■ Daytime running light system (if equipped)
To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on
automatically whenever the engine is started. The daytime running light sys-
tem is not designed for use at night.
■ Headlight control sensor (if equipped)
■ Light reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds when the key is removed and the driver’s door is opened
while the lights are turned on.
■ Customization that can be configured at any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional (vehicles
with headlight control sensor)
Setting of the light sensor sensitivity can be changed.
Occupancy and luggage
load conditions
Dial position
Occupants
Luggage
load
Single-cab
models
Extra-cab
models
Double-cab models
Left-hand
drive
vehicles
Right-hand
drive
vehicles
Driver None 0 0 0 0
Driver
Full
luggage
loading
3 4 3.5 5
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the
windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor
detecting the level of ambient light and
may cause the automatic headlight sys-
tem to malfunction.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 199 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
200
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not
running.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 200 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
201
4
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Fog light switch
∗
■ Front fog light switch (if equipped)
Turns the front fog lights
off
Turns the front fog lights
on
∗: If equipped
The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving con-
ditions, such as in rain and fog.
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 201 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
202
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Rear fog light switch (if equipped)
X Type A
Turns the rear fog light
off
Turns the rear fog light
on
X Type B
Turns the rear fog light on/off
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 202 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
203
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Front and rear fog light switch (if equipped)
Turns the front and rear
fog lights off
Turns the front fog lights
on
Turns both front and
rear fog lights on
■ Fog lights can be used when
X Vehicles with front fog lights or rear fog light only
The headlights or front position lights are turned on.
X Vehicles with both front and rear fog lights
Front fog lights: The headlights or front position lights are turned on.
Rear fog light (vehicles with front and rear fog light switch):
The headlights or front position lights are turned on.
Rear fog light (vehicles with rear fog light switch [type B]):
The headlights are turned on or both the front position lights and front fog
lights are turned on.
The rear fog light will turn off if the front position lights and front fog lights turn
off once the headlight switch has been turned to the “AUTO” position.
The rear fog light will not come on even if the front position lights and front fog
lights turn on again.
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 203 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
204
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Windshield wipers and washer
The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.
X Windshield wipers without intermittent operation
Low speed operation
High speed operation
Temporary operation
Washer operation
Operating the wiper lever
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 204 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
205
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Intermittent windshield wipers
Intermittent operation
Low speed operation
High speed operation
Temporary operation
If equipped, wiper intervals can be adjusted when intermittent opera-
tion is selected.
Increases the intermittent wind-
shield wiper frequency
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency
1
2
3
4
5
6
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 205 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
206
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Washer/wiper dual operation
The wipers will automatically oper-
ate a couple of times after the
washer squirts.
■ The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
7
CAUTION
■ Caution regarding the use of washer fluid
When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes
warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This
may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 206 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
207
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may over-
heat.
■ When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 207 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
208
4-3. Operating the lights and wipers
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Headlight cleaner switch
∗
Press the switch to clean the
headlights.
■ The headlight cleaners can be operated when
The engine switch is in the “ON” position and the headlight switch is turned
on.
■ Windshield washer linked operation
When the windshield washer is operated with the engine switch in the “ON”
position and the headlights on, the headlight cleaners will operate once.
(→P. 204)
∗: If equipped
Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.
NOTICE
■ When the washer fluid tank is empty
Do not press the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 208 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
209
4
4-4. Refueling
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Opening the fuel tank cap
● Close all the doors and windows, and turn the engine switch to the
“LOCK” position.
● Confirm the type of fuel.
■ Fuel types
X Gasoline engine
Unleaded gasoline, Research Octane Number of 91 or higher.
X Diesel engine
● EU area:
Diesel fuel conforming to European standard EN590
● Except EU area (except Russia and KUN25L-PRMDH models
*):
Diesel fuel that contains 50 ppm or less of sulfur and has a cetane number
of 48 or higher
● Except EU area (Russia):
Diesel fuel, Cetane number 48 or higher
Your vehicle must use only diesel fuel conforming to GOST R52368-2005
(Sulfur max 50 ppm).
● Except EU area (KUN25L-PRMDH model
* for Kazakhstan):
Diesel fuel that contains 500 ppm or less of sulfur and has a cetane number
of 48 or higher.
● Except EU area (KUN25L-PRMDH model
* except for Kazakhstan):
You must only use diesel fuel with a cetane number of 48 or higher.
*: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label or plate.
(→P. 494)
■ Use of ethanol blended gasoline in a gasoline engine
Toyota allows the use of ethanol blended gasoline where the ethanol content
is up to 10%. Make sure that the ethanol blended gasoline to be used has a
Research Octane Number that follows the above.
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:
Before refueling the vehicle
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 209 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
210
4-4. Refueling
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ When refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do
so may result in death or serious injury.
● After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel cap, touch an
unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to
discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from
static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.
● Type A (→P. 211) only: Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn
it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.
Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot
weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their
body to come close to an open fuel tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition
hazard.
■ When refueling
Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel
tank:
● Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.
● Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.
● Do not top off the fuel tank.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 210 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
211
4-4. Refueling
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Type A
Pull up the opener to open the
fuel filler door.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to
open.
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
NOTICE
■ Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control
system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the
vehicle’s painted surface.
Opening the fuel tank cap
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 211 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
212
4-4. Refueling
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Type B
To unlock the fuel tank cap,
insert the key and turn it coun-
terclockwise.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to
open.
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 212 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
213
4-4. Refueling
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Type A
After refueling, turn the fuel tank
cap until you hear a click. Once
the cap is released, it will turn
slightly in the opposite direction.
X Type B
Close the fuel tank cap
Make sure to put the fuel tank cap
with the arrow upward and turn it
slowly to close.
Lock the fuel cap
Turning the fuel cap key clockwise.
Closing the fuel tank cap
Arrow
1
2
CAUTION
■ When replacing the fuel tank cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your
vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in
death or serious injury.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 213 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
214
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Cruise control
∗
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the
accelerator pedal.
Indicator
Cruise control switch
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will come
on.
Press the button again to deacti-
vate the cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
The vehicle speed at the moment
the lever is released becomes the
set speed.
∗: If equipped
Summary of functions
1
2
Setting the vehicle speed
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 214 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
215
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed
is obtained.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired direc-
tion.
Large adjustment: Hold the lever in
the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time the lever is
operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continu-
ally until the lever is released.
Adjusting the set speed
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 215 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
216
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the constant speed
control.
The speed setting is also canceled
when the brakes are applied or the
clutch pedal (manual transmission
only) is depressed.
Pushing the lever up resumes
the constant speed control.
Resuming is available when the
vehicle speed is more than approx-
imately 40 km/h (25 mph).
Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 216 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
217
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Cruise control can be set when
● The shift lever is in the D or range 4.
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
● The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed
resumes.
● Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased
by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the
lever down to set the new speed.
■ Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following
situations:
● Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 16 km/h (10 mph) below
the preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
● VSC is activated. (if equipped)
■ If the cruise control indicator light turns to yellow (except for Russia and
Ukraine) or flashes (for Russia and Ukraine)
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press
the button again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels imme-
diately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control
system. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 217 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
218
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting
in death or serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 218 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
219
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Rear view monitor system
∗
The rear view monitor system will
activate when the shift lever is in
R.
Vehicles with automatic trans-
mission
Vehicles with manual transmis-
sion
If you move the lever out of R, the
rear view monitor system will be
deactivated.
When the shift lever is shifted to
the R position and any mode but-
ton (such as “SETUP”) is pressed,
the rear view monitor system is
canceled, and the screen is
switched to the mode of the button
that was pressed.
∗: If equipped
The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an
image of the view behind the vehicle while backing up, for exam-
ple while parking.
The screen illustrations used in this text are intended as examples,
and may differ from the image that is actually displayed on the
screen.
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 219 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
220
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Area displayed on screen
The rear view monitor system
displays an image of the view
from the bumper of the rear
area of the vehicle.
To adjust the image on the rear
view monitor system screen,
refer to the “Navigation system
Owner’s manual”.
• The area displayed on the
screen may vary according to
vehicle orientation conditions.
• Objects which are close to either
corner of the bumper or under
the bumper cannot be dis-
played.
• The camera uses a special lens.
The distance of the image that
appears on the screen differs
from the actual distance.
• Items which are located higher
than the camera may not be dis-
played on the monitor.
Rear view monitor system precautions
Corners of bumper
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 220 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
221
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Rear view monitor system camera
The camera for the rear view
monitor system is located on
the tailgate.
● Using the camera
If the camera lens becomes dirty, it cannot transmit a clear
image. If water droplets, snow or mud adhere to the lens, rinse
with water and wipe with a soft cloth. If the lens is extremely dirty,
wash it with a mild cleanser and rinse.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 221 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
222
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
If you notice any symptoms
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause
and the solution, and re-check.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
Things you should know
Symptom Likely cause Solution
The image is difficult to
see
• The vehicle is in a
dark area
• The temperature
around the lens is
either high or low
• The outside tempera-
ture is low
• There are water
droplets on the cam-
era
• It is raining or humid
• Foreign matter (mud
etc.) is adhering to
the camera
• There are scratches
on the camera
• Sunlight or headlights
are shining directly
into the camera
• The vehicle is under
fluorescent lights,
sodium lights, mer-
cury lights etc.
If this happens due to
these causes, it does
not indicate a malfunc-
tion.
Back up while visually
checking the vehicle’s
surroundings. (Use the
monitor again once
conditions have been
improved.)
To adjust the image on
the rear view monitor
system screen, refer to
the “Navigation system
Owner’s manual”.
The image is blurry
Dirt or foreign matter
(such as water drop-
lets, snow, mud etc.) is
adhering to the cam-
era.
Rinse the camera lens
with water and wipe it
clean with a soft cloth.
Wash with a mild soap
if the dirt is stubborn.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 222 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
223
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
The image is out of
alignment
The camera or sur-
rounding area has
received a strong
impact.
Have the vehicle
inspected by any
authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified
and equipped profes-
sional.
A vertical white streak
is on the screen
When a bright spot
(such as sunlight
reflecting off the body
of another vehicle) is
received by the cam-
era, a vertical streak
may be left above and
below the bright spot
(smear effect).
If this happens due to
these causes, it does
not indicate a malfunc-
tion. Back up while
visually checking the
vehicle’s surroundings.
(Use the monitor again
once conditions have
been improved.)
Symptom Likely cause Solution
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 223 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
224
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ When using the rear view monitor system
The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device intended to assist
the driver when backing up. When backing up, be sure to check visually
behind and all around the vehicle before proceeding.
Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in
death or serious injuries.
● Never depend on the rear view monitor system entirely when backing up.
The image and the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may
differ from the actual state.
Use caution, just as you would when backing up any vehicle.
● Be sure to back up slowly, depressing the brake pedal to control vehicle
speed.
● The instructions given are only guide lines.
When and how much to turn the steering wheel will vary according to traf-
fic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle condition, etc. when park-
ing. It is necessary to be fully aware of this before using the rear view
monitor system.
● When parking, be sure to check that the parking space will accommodate
your vehicle before maneuvering into it.
● Do not use the rear view monitor system in the following cases:
• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow
• When using tire chains
• When the tailgate is not closed completely
• On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes.
● In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the image may become
faint. The image could distort when the vehicle is moving, or you may
become unable to see the image on the screen. Be sure to check direct
visually and with the mirrors all around the vehicle before proceeding.
● If the tire sizes are changed, the position of the fixation guide lines dis-
played on the screen may change.
● The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and
pedestrians that appear in the image displayed on the screen will differ
from the actual distances.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 224 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
225
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ How to use the camera
● The rear view monitor system may not operate properly in the following
cases.
• If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the
camera may change.
• As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassem-
ble or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.
• Do not strongly rub the camera lens. If the camera lens is scratched, it
cannot transmit a clear image.
• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to
adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.
• If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured
on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.
• When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the
camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunc-
tioning.
● Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunc-
tion. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional as
soon as possible.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 225 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
226
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Four-wheel drive system
∗
H2 (high speed position, two-wheel drive)
Use this for normal driving on dry hard-surfaced roads. This position gives
greater economy, quietest ride and least wear.
H4 (high speed position, four-wheel drive)
Use this for driving only on tracks that permit the tires slide, like off-road,
icy or snow-covered roads. This position provides greater traction than
two-wheel drive.
The four-wheel drive indicator light comes on
N (neutral position)
No power is delivered to the wheels. The vehicle must be stopped.
The four-wheel drive indicator light comes on
L4 (low speed position, four-wheel drive)
Use this for maximum power and traction. Use “L4” for climbing or
descending steep hills, off-road driving, and hard pulling in sand, mud or
deep snow.
The four-wheel drive indicator light comes on
∗: If equipped
Use the front drive control lever to select the following transfer
modes.
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 226 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
227
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
The A.D.D. can be engaged or disengaged by the shifting operations
described in the following shifting procedures.
■ Shifting from H2 to H4
Reduce your speed to less than 80 km/h (50 mph).
Move the front drive control lever.
■ Shifting from H4 to H2
Simply move the front drive control lever.
In both cases, you need not depress the clutch pedal. (manual trans-
mission)
Stop the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to N.
Move the front drive control lever.
A.D.D. (automatic disconnecting differential) (if equipped)
Shifting between H2 and H4
Shifting between H4 and L4 (automatic transmission)
1
2
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 227 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
228
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Shifting from H4 to L4
Stop the vehicle or reduce your speed to less than 8 km/h
(5 mph).
With your foot off the accelerator pedal, depress the clutch pedal.
Move the front drive control lever.
■ Shifting from L4 to H4
Depress the clutch pedal.
Move the front drive control lever.
■ Four-wheel drive usage frequency (vehicles with A.D.D.)
You should drive in four-wheel drive for at least 16 km (10 miles) each month.
This will assure that the front drive components are lubricated.
■ Shifting between H2 and H4
● If you have trouble shifting in cold weather, reduce your speed or stop the
vehicle and reshift.
● If the four-wheel drive indicator does not go off when you shift from H4 to
H2, drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or drive in
reverse.
■ Shifting to L4 (vehicles with VSC)
VSC is automatically turned off.
Shifting between H4 and L4 (manual transmission)
1
2
3
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 228 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
229
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ While driving
● Never shift the front drive control lever from H2 to H4 if the wheels are slip-
ping. Stop the slipping or spinning before shifting.
● For normal driving on dry and hard surface roads, use H2 position. Driving
on dry and hard surface roads in H4 or L4 position may cause drive com-
ponent oil leakage, seizure, or other problems resulting in an accident.
Further, it may cause tire wear and increased fuel consumption.
● Avoid turning suddenly in H4 or L4 position. If you do turn suddenly, the
difference in turning speeds between the front and rear wheels may have
a similar effect to braking, thus making driving difficult.
● Securely shift the front drive control lever to H4 or L4. Otherwise, the
transfer may disengage both the front and rear driveshafts from the power-
train and allow the vehicle to move regardless of the shift position. If this
happens, the vehicle may be free to roll even if the automatic transmission
is in P.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 229 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
230
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Rear differential lock system
∗
Press the rear differential lock
switch to lock the rear differential.
At this time, the rear differential
lock indicator will blink. Wait a few
seconds for the system to com-
plete operation. After the rear dif-
ferential is locked, the indicator will
stop blinking and remain on.
To unlock the rear differential, push
the switch again.
∗: If equipped
The rear differential lock system is provided for use only when
wheel spinning occurs in a ditch or on a slippery or ragged sur-
face.
This differential lock system is effective in case one of the rear
wheels is spinning.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 230 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
231
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Automatic transmission
4WD models only: Before using the rear differential lock system, try
shifting the front drive control lever into L4. If this is not sufficient,
use the rear differential lock system as well.
Be sure to stop the wheels.
Press the rear differential lock switch.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
After the rear differential is locked, the indicator will come on.
Unlock the rear differential as soon as the vehicle moves.
X Manual transmission
4WD models only: Before using the rear differential lock system, try
shifting the front drive control lever into L4. If this is not sufficient,
use the rear differential lock system as well.
Be sure to stop the wheels.
Depress the clutch pedal.
Press the rear differential lock switch.
Slowly release the clutch pedal.
After the rear differential is locked, the indicator will come on.
Unlock the rear differential as soon as the vehicle moves.
Using the rear differential lock system
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 231 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
232
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Locking the rear differential
The following systems do not operate when the rear differential is locked.
It is normal operation for the ABS warning light, VSC OFF indicator (if
equipped) and “TRC OFF” indicator (if equipped) to be on at this time.
•ABS
• Brake assist (if equipped)
• VSC (if equipped)
• TRC (if equipped)
■ For easy unlocking
Slightly turn the steering wheel in either direction while the vehicle is in
motion.
■ Automatic unlocking feature (4WD models)
Shift the front drive control lever to H2 or H4.
Never forget to turn off the switch after using this feature.
■ After unlocking the rear differential
Check that the indicator goes off.
CAUTION
■ To avoid an accident
Failure to observe the following precautions may result in an accident.
● Do not use the rear differential lock system except when wheel spinning
occurs in a ditch or on a slippery or rugged surface. Large steering effort
and careful cornering control will be required.
● Do not lock the rear differential until the wheels have stopped spinning.
Otherwise, the vehicle may move in an unexpected direction when the dif-
ferential lock is engaged, resulting in an accident. This may also lead to
possible damage to rear differential lock component parts.
● Do not drive over 8 km/h (5 mph) when the differential is locked.
● Do not keep driving with the rear differential lock switch on.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 232 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
233
4
4-5. Using the driving support systems
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Driving assist systems
◆ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) (if equipped)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the
brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface
◆ Brake assist (if equipped)
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation
◆ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) (if equipped)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on
slippery road surfaces
◆ TRC (Traction Control) (if equipped)
Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spinning
when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads
◆ LSD (Limited Slip Differential) (if equipped)
Helps traction when one rear wheel begins to spin by automatically trans-
mitting driving force to the other rear wheel
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following
systems operate automatically in response to various driving
situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supple-
mentary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operat-
ing the vehicle.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 233 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
234
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
If the vehicle is in danger of slip-
ping or if any of the drive wheels
spins, the slip indicator flashes to
indicate that the TRC/VSC sys-
tems are operating.
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, the TRC/VSC systems
may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to
turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
■ Turning off TRC system only
To turn the TRC system off,
quickly press and release the
switch.
The “TRC OFF” indicator light
will come on.
Press the switch again to turn
the system back on.
When the TRC/VSC systems are operating
Disabling the TRC/VSC systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 234 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
235
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Turning off both TRC and VSC systems
To turn the TRC and VSC sys-
tems off, press and hold the
switch for more than 3 seconds
while the vehicle is stopped.
The “TRC OFF” indicator light
and VSC OFF indicator light will
come on.
Press the switch again to turn
the system back on.
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC and TRC
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate
that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are
operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
■ Reactivation of the TRC/VSC systems after turning off the engine
Turning off the engine after turning off the TRC/VSC systems will automati-
cally reactivate them.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 235 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
236
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Reactivation of the TRC system linked to vehicle speed
When only the TRC system is turned off, the TRC system will turn on when
vehicle speed increases. However, when both TRC and VSC systems are
turned off, the systems will not turn on even when vehicle speed increases.
■ If the slip indicator light comes on...
It may indicate a malfunction in the VSC and TRC. Consult any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
CAUTION
■ The ABS does not operate effectively when
● The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as
excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick
road.
■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of nor-
mal conditions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the
following situations:
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 236 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
237
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ TRC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slip-
pery road surfaces, even if the TRC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
■ When the VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully.
Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the
indicator light flashes.
■ When the TRC/VSC systems are turned off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road condi-
tions. As these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving
force, do not turn the TRC/VSC systems off unless necessary.
■ Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and
total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the
recommended tire inflation pressure level.
The ABS, TRC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires
are installed on the vehicle.
Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional for further information when replacing tires or
wheels.
■ Handling of tires and the suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect
the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 237 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
238
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter) system
∗
■ Regeneration
Regeneration is performed as necessary in accordance with driving
conditions.
■ System characteristics
The DPF system has the following characteristics:
● Idle speed increases during regeneration
● The smell of the exhaust gas differs from that of a conventional
diesel vehicle
X Vehicles without the DPF system switch
If the DPF system warning light turns on, drive continuously.
(→P. 454)
If the DPF system warning light flashes, have the vehicle inspected by
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional immediately. (→P. 451)
∗: If equipped
When the deposit collected by the filter reaches a predetermined
amount, it is automatically regenerated.
DPF system failure warning
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 238 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
239
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Vehicles with the DPF system switch
If the DPF system warning light and the indicator light on DPF system
switch turn on or flash, follow the procedure below to regenerate.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P (automatic
transmission) or N (manual transmission). Release the clutch
pedal.
Do not stop the engine.
Also, make sure that there are no flammable materials near the exhaust
pipe. (→P. 241)
Press the switch.
The DPF system warning light and
the indicator light on the switch will
change from solid or rapid flashing
to slow flashing, and the idling
engine speed will increase.
Regeneration will take around 20 -
30
* minutes to complete.
When the DPF system warning
light goes out, the idling engine
speed will have finished returning
to normal.
*: Differs in accordance with the
outside temperature.
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 239 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
240
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Regeneration with the DPF system switch (if equipped)
● After pressing the DPF system switch, do not depress the accelerator pedal
or the clutch pedal (manual transmission). Depressing the pedal(s) will stop
regeneration. If regeneration has been stopped, restart regeneration as
soon as possible.
● If regeneration is carried out while the exhaust pipe is hot (for example
directly after driving), it will take less time than when the engine is cold.
■ Replacing the engine oil
Make sure to use an oil of the recommended grade or of matching quality.
(→P. 500)
■ DPF system warning
Under the following driving conditions, the DPF system warning light may
come on earlier than normal.
*
● When only driving at low speeds (for example 20 km/h [12 mph] or below).
● If the engine is turned on and off frequently (if the engine is not left running
for more than 10 minutes at a time).
*: Differs in accordance with weather, driving conditions, etc.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 240 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
241
4-5. Using the driving support systems
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ During regeneration
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in burning injuries caused by the hot exhaust
pipe and exhaust gases, or may cause a fire.
● Vehicles with the DPF system switch: Do not carry out regeneration when
the vehicle is in an enclosed area, such as a garage.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipe and exhaust gases during regeneration.
● Do not place flammable materials near
the exhaust pipe.
● Make sure that there are no people
near the exhaust pipe.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 241 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
242
4-5. Using the driving support systems
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ If the malfunction indicator light comes on
The malfunction indicator light comes on if you continue driving while the
DPF system warning light is flashing. In this event, damage may be caused
to the vehicle or an accident may occur. Have the vehicle inspected by any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional immediately.
NOTICE
■ To prevent the DPF system from failing
● Do not drive for long periods of time while the DPF system warning light is
flashing
● Do not use fuel other than the specified type
● Do not use engine oil other than the recommended type
● Do not modify the exhaust pipe
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 242 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
243
4
4-6. Driving tips
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Winter driving tips
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tempera-
tures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
● Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.
● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire
chains for the rear tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match
the size of the tires.
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before
driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a man-
ner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions.
Pre-winter preparations
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 243 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
244
4-6. Driving tips
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Perform the following according to the driving conditions:
● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen.
Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away
the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in
front of the windshield.
● Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accu-
mulated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the
tires or on the brakes.
● Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before
getting in the vehicle.
Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and
the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road con-
ditions.
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P (automatic transmis-
sion) or 1 or R (manual transmission) without setting the parking
brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being
released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvertent sliding
or creeping.
Before driving the vehicle
When driving the vehicle
When parking the vehicle (in the winter time or in the cold lati-
tudes)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 244 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
245
4-6. Driving tips
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the snow chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on loca-
tion and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing
chains.
■ Tire chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not install tire chains on the front tires.
● Install tire chains on rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after
driving 0.5 - 1.0 km (1/4 - 1/2 mile).
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.
Selecting tire chains
Regulations on the use of tire chains
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 245 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
246
4-6. Driving tips
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or
serious injury.
● Use tires of the specified size.
● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
● Do not drive at speeds in excess of the speed limit or the speed limit spec-
ified for the snow tires being used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
■ Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely,
and may cause death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being
used, or 50 km/h (30 mph), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting
operations that cause sudden engine braking.
● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle con-
trol is maintained.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 246 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
247
4-6. Driving tips
4
Driving
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 247 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
248
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
5-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger
Boost ventilator system......250
Manual air conditioning
system .............................253
Automatic air conditioning
system .............................260
Power heater .....................267
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror
defoggers.........................268
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 248 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
249
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
5-2. Using the audio system
Audio system type .............270
Using the radio ..................272
Using the CD player ..........276
Playing back MP3 and
WMA discs.......................281
Operating an iPod..............287
Operating a
USB memory ...................295
Optimal use of the
audio system ...................303
Using the AUX port............306
Bluetooth
®
audio/phone.....307
Using the Bluetooth
®
audio/phone.....................312
Operating a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable
player...............................316
Making a phone call...........319
Using the “SETUP”
menu (“Bluetooth
*”
menu) ..............................324
Using the “SETUP” menu
(“TEL” or “PHONE”
menu) ..............................331
5-3. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list.................338
• Personal/interior light
main switch....................339
• Personal/interior
lights ..............................339
• Interior light....................340
5-4. Using the storage features
List of storage features ......341
• Glove box ......................343
• Console box ..................343
• Cup holders ...................344
• Bottle holders ................345
• Auxiliary boxes ..............346
Deck hooks ........................347
5-5. Other interior features
Sun visors and vanity
mirror ...............................348
Clock..................................349
Ashtray...............................350
Cigarette lighter .................351
Power outlet.......................352
Seat heaters ......................353
Compass............................355
Using the steering wheel
audio switches .................361
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 249 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
250
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Boost ventilator system
∗
To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial clockwise
(increase) or counterclockwise (decrease).
Turning the dial to “OFF” turns off the fan.
To select the air outlets, set the air outlet selector dial to the desired
position.
The positions between the air outlet selections shown below can also be
selected for more delicate adjustment.
∗: If equipped
Outside/recirculated air mode
lever
Fan speed control dial
Air outlet selector dial
Adjusting the settings
1
2
3
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 250 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
251
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Upper body
Upper body and feet
Move the outside/recirculated air mode lever.
The mode switches between (introduces air from outside the vehi-
cle) and (recycles air inside the vehicle) each time the lever is
moved.
Air outlets and air flow
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 251 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
252
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Close the vents.
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the out-
side/recirculated air mode lever to the recirculated air mode. This is effective
in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior.
■ Air conditioning filter
→P. 404
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
1
2
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the boost ventilator system on longer than necessary when the
engine is off.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 252 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
253
5
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Manual air conditioning system
∗
∗: If equipped
Cooling and dehumidification
function on/off button (if
equipped)
Outside/recirculated air mode
lever
Temperature control dial
Fan speed control dial
Air outlet selector dial
1
2
3
4
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 253 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
254
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial clockwise
(increase) or counterclockwise (decrease).
Turning the dial to “OFF” turns off the fan.
To adjust the temperature setting, turn the temperature control dial
clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool).
If the “A/C” button is not pressed, the system will blow ambient tempera-
ture air or heated air. (if equipped)
To select the air outlets, set the air outlet selector dial to the desired
position.
The positions between the air outlet selections shown below can also be
selected for more delicate adjustment.
Adjusting the settings
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 254 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
255
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Set the air outlet selector dial to
position.
Set the outside/recirculated air
mode lever to outside air mode if
recirculated air mode is used.
Perform the following operations accordingly:
● To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial.
● To adjust the temperature setting, turn the temperature control
dial.
● If the dehumidification function is not operating, press the “A/C”
button to operate the dehumidification function. (if equipped)
To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air
flow and temperature up.
Defogging the windshield
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 255 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
256
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Upper body
Upper body and feet
: Some models
Feet
: Some models
Air outlets and air flow
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 256 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
257
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Feet and windshield
: Some models
Move the outside/recirculated air mode lever.
The mode switches between (introduces air from outside the vehi-
cle) and (recycles air inside the vehicle) each time the lever is
moved.
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Close the vents.
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 257 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
258
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Fogging up of the windows
● The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.
Turning the “A/C” button on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog
the windshield effectively. (if equipped)
● If you turn the “A/C” button off, the windows may fog up more easily. (if
equipped)
● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the out-
side/recirculated air mode lever to the recirculated air mode. This is effective
in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling
operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior
effectively.
■ When the outside temperature falls to nearly 0°C (32°F)
The dehumidification function may not operate even when the “A/C” button is
pressed. (if equipped)
■ Ventilation and air conditioning odors
● To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into
and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to
be emitted from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from occurring:
It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
■ Air conditioning filter
→P. 404
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 258 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
259
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not set the air outlet selector dial to during cool air operation in
extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the
outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the
windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is off.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 259 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
260
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Automatic air conditioning system
∗
∗: If equipped
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according
to the temperature setting.
Fan speed display
Cooling and dehumidification
function on/off button
Air intake display
Recirculated air mode button
Air outlet display
Outside air mode button
Off button
Automatic mode button
Temperature control buttons
Windshield defogger button
Temperature setting display
Air outlet selector buttons
Fan speed control buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 260 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
261
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Press the “AUTO” button.
The dehumidification function begins to operate. Air outlets and fan
speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature set-
ting.
Press to increase the temperature and to decrease
the temperature.
Press the “A/C” button.
The cooling and dehumidification function switches between on and
off each time the button is pressed.
■ Automatic mode indicator
If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the auto-
matic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for func-
tions other than that operated are maintained.
To adjust the fan speed, press to increase the fan speed and
to decrease the fan speed.
Press the “OFF” button to turn the fan off.
To adjust the temperature setting, press to increase the tem-
perature and to decrease the temperature.
To change the air outlets, press , , or
.
Using the automatic air conditioning system
Adjusting the settings manually
1
2
3
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 261 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
262
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Press .
The dehumidification function
operates and fan speed increases.
Press the outside air mode button
if the recirculated air mode is used.
(It may switch automatically.)
To defog the windshield and the
side windows early, turn the air
flow and temperature up.
To return to the previous mode,
press again when the wind-
shield is defogged.
Defogging the windshield
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 262 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
263
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Upper body
Upper body and feet
: Some models
Feet
: Some models
Air outlets and air flow
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 263 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
264
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Feet and windshield
: Some models
Press to switch to recirculated air mode and press to
switch to outside air mode.
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Close the vents.
Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 264 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
265
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Using automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and
the ambient conditions.
Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow
immediately after the “AUTO” button is pressed.
■ Fogging up of the windows
● The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.
Turning the “A/C” button on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog
the windshield effectively.
● If you turn the “A/C” button off, the windows may fog up more easily.
● The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.
■ Outside/recirculated air mode
● When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, press the
recirculated air mode button. This is effective in preventing outside air from
entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the recircu-
lated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.
● Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the
temperature setting or the inside temperature.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 265 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
266
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Ventilation and air conditioning odors
● To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into
and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to
be emitted from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from occurring:
It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
■ Air conditioning filter
→P. 404
CAUTION
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather.
The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the
windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking
your vision.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is off.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 266 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
267
5
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Power heater
∗
Turns the power heater on/off
If you do not turn the switch to off,
the engine speed is increased
whenever the engine is started.
■ Power heater can be operated when
The engine is running.
∗: If equipped
This feature is used to keep the cabin warm in cold conditions.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 267 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
268
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Rear window and outside rear view mirror
defoggers
∗
X Vehicles without automatic air conditioning system
Turns the rear window and out-
side rear view mirror defoggers
on/off
X Vehicles with automatic air conditioning system
Turns the rear window and out-
side rear view mirror defoggers
on/off
The defoggers will automatically
turn off after approximately 15 min-
utes.
∗: If equipped
Defoggers are used to defog the rear window, and to remove
raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors (if
equipped).
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 268 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
269
5-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ The defoggers can be operated when
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■ Outside rear view mirror defoggers (vehicles with outside rear view mir-
ror defoggers)
Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror
defoggers on.
CAUTION
■ When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on (vehicles with out-
side rear view mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirrors, as they can
become very hot and burn you.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Turn the defoggers off when the engine is off.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 269 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
270
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Audio system type
∗
X Vehicles with a navigation system or multimedia system
Refer to the “Navigation system Owner’s manual”.
X Vehicles without a navigation system or multimedia system
CD player with AM/FM radio
∗: If equipped
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 270 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
271
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular
phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is
operating.
Title Page
Using the radio P. 272
Using the CD player P. 276
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs P. 281
Operating an iPod P. 287
Operating a USB memory P. 295
Optimal use of the audio system P. 303
Using the AUX port P. 306
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine
stopped.
■ To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 271 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
272
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Using the radio
Search for the desired stations by turning the tune/scroll knob or
pressing the “<” or “>” button of “SEEK•TRACK”.
Press and hold one of the station selectors ( ) to be set until you
hear a beep.
Power
Volume
AM/FM mode button
AF/region code/TA mode setup
Tune/scroll knob
Adjusting the frequency
Seeking the frequency
Station selectors
Displaying the station list
Setting station presets
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 272 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
273
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Updating the station list
Press (LIST).
The station list will be displayed.
Press (UPDATE) to update the list.
“Updating” is displayed while the searching is in process, and then avail-
able stations will be listed on the display.
To cancel the updating process, press
(BACK).
■
Selecting a station from the station list
Press (LIST).
The station list will be displayed.
Turn the tune/scroll knob to select a station.
Press the knob to tune in the station.
To return to the previous display, press (BACK).
This feature allows your radio to receive station.
■ Listening to stations of the same network
Press the tune/scroll knob.
Turn the knob to “RADIO” and press the knob.
Turn the knob as corresponds to the desired mode: “FM AF” or
“Region code”.
Press the knob to select “ON” or “OFF”.
FM AF ON mode:
The station among those of the same network with strong recep-
tion is selected.
Region code ON mode:
The station among those of the same network with strong recep-
tion and broadcasting the same program is selected.
Using the station list
RDS (Radio Data System)
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 273 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
274
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Traffic information
Press the tune/scroll knob.
Turn the knob to “RADIO” and press the knob.
Turn the knob to “FM TA” mode.
Press the knob to select “ON” or “OFF”.
TP mode:
The system automatically switches to traffic information when a
broadcast with a traffic information signal is received.
The station returns to the previous one when the traffic information
ends.
TA mode:
The system automatically switches to traffic information when a
broadcast with a traffic information signal is received. In FM
modes, the system will be mute unless traffic information is being
broadcast.
The audio system returns to the previous mode when the traffic informa-
tion ends.
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 274 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
275
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ EON (Enhanced Other Network) system (for traffic announcement func-
tion)
If the RDS station (with EON data) you are listening to is not broadcasting a
traffic information program and the audio system is in the TA (traffic
announcement) mode, the radio will be switched automatically to a station
broadcasting a traffic information program in the EON AF list when traffic
information begins.
■ When the battery is disconnected
Stations presets are erased.
■ Reception sensitivity
● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continu-
ally changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and sur-
rounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
● The radio antenna is mounted on the roof. The antenna can be removed
from the base by turning.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage, remove the antenna in the following cases
● The antenna will touch the ceiling of a garage.
● A cover will be put on the roof.
● When driving through an automatic car wash.
● Any other cases where there is a risk of touching surrounding parts.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 275 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
276
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Using the CD player
Insert a CD.
Press and remove the CD.
Turn the tune/scroll knob or press the “<” or “>” button of
“SEEK•TRACK” to move up or down until the desired track number is
displayed.
Power
Volume
CD eject
Changing the audio source/
playback
Tune/scroll knob
Selecting a track
Selecting a track, fast forward-
ing or rewinding
Random play or back button
Repeat play
Displaying track list
Displaying text message
Loading CDs
Ejecting CDs
Selecting a track
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 276 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
277
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Press (LIST).
The track list will be displayed.
Turn and press the tune/scroll knob to select a track.
To return to the previous display, press (BACK).
Press and hold the “<” or “>” button of “SEEK•TRACK”.
Press (RDM).
To cancel, press (RDM) again.
Press (RPT).
To cancel, press (RPT) again.
Press (TEXT) to display or hide the CD title.
If there are continuing texts, is displayed.
Press and hold (TEXT) to display the remaining texts.
Selecting a track from a track list
Fast-forwarding and rewinding tracks
Random play
Repeat play
Switching the display
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 277 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
278
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Display
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed
properly or may not be displayed at all.
■ Error messages
“ERROR”:
This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player.
“CD CHECK”:
The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted upside-down.
“WAIT”:
Operation has stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for a
while and then press the “MODE” button. If the CD still cannot be played
back, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-
fied and equipped professional.
■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc fea-
tures, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protect features may not play correctly.
■ CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
■ If a CD is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended
periods
The CD may be damaged and may not play properly.
■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 278 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
279
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs.
Also, do not use 8 cm (3 in.) CD adapters, DualDiscs or printable discs.
Doing so may damage the player and/or the CD insert/eject function.
● CDs that have a diameter that is not 12
cm (4.7 in.)
● Low-quality and deformed CDs
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 279 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
280
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ CD Player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the
CDs or the player itself.
● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
● Do not apply oil to the CD player.
● Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
● CDs with a transparent or translucent
recording area
● CDs that have tape, stickers or CD-R
labels attached to them, or that have
had the label peeled off
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 280 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
281
5
5-2. Using the audio system
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs
→P. 2 7 6
Power
Volume
CD eject
Changing the audio source/
playback
Tune/scroll knob
Selecting a file
Selecting a file, fast forward-
ing or rewinding
Random play or back button
Repeat play
Selecting a folder
Displaying folder list
Displaying text message
Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 281 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
282
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Selecting folders one at a time
Press (<FOLDER) or (FOLDER>) to select the desired
folder.
■ Selecting a folder and file from folder list
Press (LIST).
The folder list will be displayed.
Turn and press the tune/scroll knob to select a folder and a file.
To return to the previous display, press (BACK).
■
Returning to the first folder
Press and hold (<FOLDER) until you hear a beep.
Turn the tune/scroll knob or press the “<” or “>” button of
“SEEK•TRACK” to select the desired file.
Press and hold the “<” or “>” button of “SEEK•TRACK”.
Pressing (RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Folder random→Disc random→Off
Pressing (RPT) changes modes in the following order:
File repeat→Folder repeat
*→Off
*: Available except when RDM (random play) is selected
Selecting a folder
Selecting a file
Fast forwarding and rewinding files
Random play
Repeat play
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 282 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
283
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Press (TEXT) to display or hide the album title.
If there are continuing texts, is displayed.
Press and hold (TEXT) to display the remaining texts.
■ Display
→P. 278
■ Error messages
“ERROR”:
This indicates a trouble either in the CD or inside the player.
“CD CHECK”:
The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.
“NO SUPPORT”:
This indicates that the MP3/WMA file is not included in the CD.
■ Discs that can be used
→P. 2 7 8
■ CD player protection feature
→P. 2 7 8
■ If a CD is left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended
periods
→P. 2 7 8
■ Lens cleaners
→P. 2 7 8
Switching the display
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 283 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
284
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 for-
mat.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats
recorded by them that can be used.
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32—320 (kbps)
• MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8—160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and mon-
aural
● WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48—192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48—320 (kbps)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 284 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
285
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
● Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-
RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status
of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may
jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
● Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
•Disc formats:
CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats:
ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above
may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be
displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those
with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● Multi-sessions
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play
discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can
be played.
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 285 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
286
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
● MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc
are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file
is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do
not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unneces-
sary folders.
If the discs contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data,
only music data can be played.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and
WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to
the speakers.
● Playback
• To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate
of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances,
depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3
and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encod-
ing and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback
may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may
take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may
not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used
→P. 279
■ CD Player precautions
→P. 280
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 286 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
287
5
5-2. Using the audio system
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Operating an iPod
Open the cover and connect an
iPod using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if it is
not turned on.
Press the “MODE” button repeatedly until “iPod” is displayed.
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle
speakers.
Connecting an iPod
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 287 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
288
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Press (MENU) to select iPod menu mode.
Turning the tune/scroll knob clockwise changes the play mode in
the following order:
“Playlists” → “Artists” → “Albums” → “Songs” → “Podcasts” →
“Genres” → “Composers” → “Audiobooks”
Press the knob to select the desired play mode.
Control panel
Power
Volume
Changing the audio source/
playback
Tune/scroll knob
Selecting an iPod menu/song
Selecting a song, fast-forward-
ing or rewinding
Random play or back button
Repeat play
iPod menu mode, playback
Displaying song list
Displaying text message
Selecting a play mode
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 288 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
289
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Play mode list
■ Selecting a list
Turn the tune/scroll knob to display the first selection list.
Press the knob to select the desired item and display the second
selection list.
Repeat the same procedure to select the desired item.
To return to the previous selection list, press (BACK).
Press (PLAY) to play the desired selection.
Play mode
First
selection
Second
selection
Third
selection
Fourth
selection
“Playlists”
Playlists
select
Songs select - -
“Artists” Artists select
Albums
select
Songs select -
“Albums”
Albums
select
Songs select - -
“Songs” Songs select - - -
“Podcasts”
Podcasts
select
Episodes
select
- -
“Genres” Genre select Artists select
Albums
select
Songs select
“Composers”
Composers
select
Albums
select
Songs select -
“Audiobooks”
Audiobooks
select
Chapter
select
- -
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 289 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
290
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Turn the tune/scroll knob or press the “<” or “>” button of
“SEEK•TRACK” to select the desired song.
Press (LIST).
The song list will be displayed.
Turn the tune/scroll knob to select a song.
Press the knob to play the song.
To return to the previous display, press (BACK).
Press and hold the “<” or “>” button of “SEEK•TRACK”.
Press (RPT).
To cancel, press (RPT) again.
Pressing (RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Track random→Album random→Off
Selecting songs
Selecting a song from the song list
Fast-forwarding and rewinding songs
Repeat play
Random play
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 290 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
291
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Press the (TEXT) display or hide the album title.
If there are continuing texts, is displayed.
Press and hold (TEXT) to display the remaining texts.
■ About iPod
● “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory
has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively,
and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance stan-
dards.
● Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this acces-
sory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.
● iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod shuffle, and iPod touch are
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
■ iPod functions
● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode,
the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last used.
● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions
may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once
again may resolve some malfunctions.
● While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own
controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle’s audio system
instead.
Switching the display
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 291 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
292
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ iPod problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect
your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it.
For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Man-
ual.
■ Display
→P. 278
■ Error messages
“ERROR”:
This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.
“NO SONGS”:
This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
“NO PLAYLIST”:
This indicates that some available songs are not found in a selected playlist.
“UPDATE YOUR iPod”:
This indicates that the version of the iPod is not compatible. Upgrade your
iPod software to the latest version.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 292 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
293
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Compatible models
The following iPod
®
, iPod nano
®
, iPod classic
®
, iPod touch
®
and iPhone
®
devices can be used with this system.
● Made for
• iPod touch (5th generation)
• iPod touch (4th generation)
• iPod touch (3rd generation)
• iPod touch (2nd generation)
• iPod touch (1st generation)
• iPod classic
• iPod with video
• iPod nano (6th generation)
• iPod nano (5th generation)
• iPod nano (4th generation)
• iPod nano (3rd generation)
• iPod nano (2nd generation)
• iPod nano (1st generation)
• iPhone 5
• iPhone 4S
• iPhone 4
• iPhone 3GS
• iPhone 3G
• iPhone
Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some
models might be incompatible with this system.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
● Maximum number of lists in device: 9999
● Maximum number of songs in device: 65535
● Maximum number of songs per list: 65535
CAUTION
■ While driving
Do not connect iPod or operate the controls. Doing so may cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 293 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
294
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to iPod
● Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may
become high, resulting in damage to the iPod.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is
connected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or
its terminal.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 294 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
295
5
5-2. Using the audio system
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Operating a USB memory
Open the cover and connect a
USB memory.
Turn on the power of the USB
memory if it is not turned on.
Press the “MODE” button repeatedly until “USB” is displayed.
Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the
vehicle speakers.
Connecting a USB memory
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 295 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
296
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Control panel
Power
Volume
Changing the audio source/
playback
Tune/scroll knob
Selecting a file
Selecting a song, fast-forward-
ing or rewinding
Random play or back button
Repeat play
Selecting a folder
Displaying folder list
Displaying text message
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 296 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
297
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Selecting folders one at a time
Press (<FOLDER) or (FOLDER>) to select the desired
folder.
■ Selecting a folder and file from folder list
Press (LIST).
The folder list will be displayed.
Turn and press the tune/scroll knob to select a folder and file.
To return to the previous display, press (BACK).
■
Returning to the first folder
Press and hold (<FOLDER) until you hear a beep.
Turn the tune/scroll knob or press the “<” or “>” button of
“SEEK•TRACK” to select the desired file.
Selecting a folder
Selecting a file
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 297 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
298
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Press and hold the “<” or “>” button of “SEEK•TRACK”.
Pressing (RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Folder random→All folder random→Off
Pressing (RPT) changes modes in the following order:
File repeat→Folder repeat
*→Off
*: Available except when RDM (random play) is selected
Press (TEXT) to display or hide the album title.
If there are continuing texts, is displayed.
Press and hold (TEXT) to display the remaining texts.
Fast-forwarding and rewinding files
Random play
Repeat play
Switching the display
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 298 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
299
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ USB memory functions
● Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, the device
itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be available. If the
device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as
opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and recon-
necting it once again may resolve the problem.
● If the USB memory still does not begin operation after being disconnected
and reconnected, format the memory.
■ Display
→P. 278
■ Error messages
“ERROR”:
This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection.
“NO MUSIC”:
This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB memory.
■ USB memory
● Compatible devices
USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback
● Compatible device formats
The following device formats can be used:
• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12mbps)
• File formats: FAT12/16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may
not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be dis-
played correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in a device: 9999
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 299 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
300
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
● MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by
using MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/for-
mats recorded by them that can be used.
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32—320 (kbps)
• MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8—160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and mon-
aural
● WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48—192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48—320 (kbps)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 300 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
301
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those
with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3
tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
● MP3 and WMA playback
• When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in the
USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first
MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we
recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3 or WMA
files or create any unnecessary folders.
• When the USB device is connected and the audio source is changed to
USB memory mode, the USB device will start playing the first file in the
first folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the con-
tents have not been changed), the USB memory will resume play from
the same point in which it was last used.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be skipped (not played).
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 301 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
302
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
● Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3
and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encod-
ing and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback
may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
CAUTION
■ While driving
Do not connect USB memory or operate the controls. Doing so may cause
an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to USB memory
● Do not leave USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehi-
cle may become high, resulting in damage to the USB memory.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory
while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB
memory or its terminal.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 302 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
303
5
5-2. Using the audio system
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Optimal use of the audio system
Displays the “SETUP” menu/
Selecting the mode
Changes the following settings
• Sound quality and volume
balance
→P. 3 0 4
The sound quality and balance
setting can be changed to pro-
duce the best sound.
• Automatic Sound Levelizer
→P. 3 0 5
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 303 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
304
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Changing sound quality modes
Press the tune/scroll knob.
Turn the knob to select “Sound Setting”.
Press the knob.
Turn the knob as corresponds to the desired mode.
“BASS”, “TREBLE”, “FADER”, “BALANCE”, or “ASL” can be selected.
Press the knob.
■ Adjusting sound quality
Turning the tune/scroll knob adjusts the level.
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode.
Press the knob or (BACK) to return to the sound setting menu.
Using the audio control function
1
2
3
4
5
Sound
quality mode
Mode
displayed
Level
Turn to the
left
Turn to the
right
Bass* “BASS” -5 to 5
Low High
Treble* “TREBLE” -5 to 5
Front/rear volume
balance
“FADER” F7 to R7 Shifts to rear Shifts to front
Left/right
volume
balance
“BALANCE”
L7 to R7 Shifts to left Shifts to right
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 304 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
305
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
When ASL is selected, turn the tune/scroll knob to change the
amount of ASL.
“LOW”, “MID”, “HIGH”, or “OFF” can be selected.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to
vehicle speed.
Press the knob or (BACK) to return to the sound setting menu.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 305 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
306
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Using the AUX port
Open the cover and connect
the portable audio device.
Press the “MODE” button repeatedly until “AUX” is displayed.
■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other
adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable
audio device.
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and lis-
ten to it using the vehicle’s speakers.
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 306 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
307
5
5-2. Using the audio system
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Bluetooth
®
audio/phone
The Bluetooth
®
audio system enables you to enjoy music played on a
portable digital audio player (portable player) from the vehicle speak-
ers via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth
®
, a wireless data system capa-
ble of playing portable audio music without cables. If your portable
player does not support Bluetooth
®
, the Bluetooth
®
audio system will
not function.
This system supports Bluetooth
®
, which allows you to make or
receive calls without using cables to connect a cellular phone and the
system, and without operating the cellular phone.
■ Conditions affecting operation
The Bluetooth
®
audio/phone may not operate normally in the following situa-
tions:
● The portable player does not support Bluetooth
®
● The cellular phone is located outside the service area
● The Bluetooth
®
device is switched off
● The Bluetooth
®
device has a low battery
● The Bluetooth
®
device is not connected to the system
● The Bluetooth
®
device is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box,
or metal material covers or touches the device
Bluetooth
®
audio
Bluetooth
®
phone (hands-free phone system)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 307 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
308
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improp-
erly accessed. (→P. 330)
■ About Bluetooth
®
■ Compatible models
● Bluetooth
®
specifications:
Ver. 1.1, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR or higher)
● Following Profiles:
• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (recom-
mended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (recom-
mended: Ver. 1.3 or higher)
Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be
connected to the Bluetooth
®
audio/phone. However, please note that some
functions may be limited depending on the type of portable player.
● Cellular phone
• HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (Recommended: Ver. 1.5)
• OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1
• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0
■ Certification
The latest “DECLARATION of CONFORMITY”(DoC) is available at the
following:
DoC address: FUJITSU TEN LIMITED
2-28, Gosho-dori 1-chome, Hyogo-ku, Kobe, 652-8510, Japan
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 308 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
309
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 309 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
310
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 310 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
311
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ While driving
Do not use the portable audio player or connect the Bluetooth
®
system.
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth
®
antennas. People with implantable
cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or
implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable dis-
tance between themselves and the Bluetooth
®
antennas. The radio waves
may affect the operation of such devices.
● Before using Bluetooth
®
devices, users of any electrical medical device
other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization
therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should con-
sult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation
under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected
effects on the operation of such medical devices.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to portable players
Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the
vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 311 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
312
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Using the Bluetooth
®
audio/phone
Bluetooth
®
connection condi-
tion
If “BT” is not displayed, the
Bluetooth
®
audio/phone cannot be
used.
Display
A message, name, number, etc.
is displayed.
Lower-case characters and special
characters may not be displayed.
Tune/scroll knob
Displays set up menu or selects items such as menu and number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Displays set up menu or inputs the selected item
Selects speed dials (Bluetooth
®
phone operation)
On-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system off/ends a call/refuses a call
Off-hook switch
Turns the hands-free system on/starts a call
Press and hold: Displays information that is too long to be dis-
played at one time on the display (Bluetooth
®
audio operation)
Audio unit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 312 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
313
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
You can use the microphone
when talking on the phone.
The person you are speaking to
can be heard from the speakers.
To use the hands-free system, you
must register your Bluetooth
®
phone in the system. (→P. 313)
Before using the Bluetooth
®
audio/phone, it is necessary to register a
Bluetooth
®
device in the system. Follow the procedure below to regis-
ter (pair) a device:
Press the tune/scroll knob and select “Bluetooth
*” using the knob.
Press the knob and select “Pairing” using the knob.
A passkey will be displayed.
SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) incompatible Bluetooth
®
devices:
Input the passkey into the device.
SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth
®
devices:
Select “YES” to register the device. Depending on the type of
device, it may register automatically.
If a Bluetooth
®
device has both music player and cellular phone func-
tions, both functions will be registered at the same time. When delet-
ing the device, both functions will be deleted at the same time.
If the off-hook switch is pressed and the “TEL” or “PHONE” mode is
entered when no phones have been registered, the registration
screen will be automatically displayed.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Microphone
Using the Bluetooth
®
audio/phone for the first time
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 313 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
314
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Menu list of the Bluetooth
®
audio/phone
First menu Second menu Third menu Operation details
“Bluetooth*”
“Pairing” -
Registering a
Bluetooth
®
device
“List phone” -
Listing the registered
cellular phones
“List audio” -
Listing the registered
portable players
“Passkey” -
Changing the pass-
key
“BT Power” -
Setting automatic
connection of the
device on or off
“Bluetooth
* info”
“Device name”
“Device address”
Displaying the
device status
“Display setting” -
Setting the auto-
matic connection
confirmation display
to on or off
“Initialize” -
Initializing the set-
tings
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 314 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
315
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Bluetooth
®
audio/phone system functions
Depending on the Bluetooth
®
device, certain functions may not be available.
First menu Second menu Third menu Operation details
“TEL” or
“PHONE”
“Phonebook”
“Add contacts”
Adding a new num-
ber
“Add SD”
Registering a speed
dial
“Delete call
history”
Deleting a number
stored in the call his-
tory
“Delete contacts”
Deleting a number
stored in the phone-
book
“Delete other PB”
Deleting a phone-
book’s data
“HF sound
setting”
“Call volume” Setting call volume
“Ringtone
volume”
Setting ring tone vol-
ume
“Ringtone” Setting the ring tone
“Transfer
histories”
-
Transferring the call
histories
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 315 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
316
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Operating a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable
player
Power
Volume
Changing the audio source/
playback
Selecting a track, fast-forward-
ing or rewinding
Random play or back button
Repeat play
Selecting an album
Playback/pause
Displaying text message
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 316 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
317
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Press (<FOLDER) or (FOLDER>) to select desired album.
Press the “<” or “>” button of “SEEK•TRACK” to select the desired
track.
Press and hold the “<” or “>” button of “SEEK•TRACK”.
Pressing (RPT) changes modes in the following order:
Track repeat→Album repeat→Off
Pressing (RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Album random→All track random→Off
Selecting an album
Selecting a track
Fast-forwarding and rewinding tracks
Repeat play
Random play
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 317 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
318
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Press ( ).
Press (TEXT) to display or hide the album title.
If there are continuing texts, is displayed.
Press and hold the button to display the remaining texts.
■ Bluetooth
®
audio system functions
Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain
functions may not be available.
■ Display
→P. 278
Playing and pausing tracks
Switching the display
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 318 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
319
5
5-2. Using the audio system
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Making a phone call
● Making a phone call
• Dialing by inputting a name
• Speed dialing
• Dialing by entering the number
• Dialing from call histories
● Receiving a phone call
• Answering the phone
• Refusing the call
● Operations during a call
• Transferring a call
• Muting your voice
• Inputting digits
• Setting call volume
● Adjusting the ring tone volume when receiving a call
To enter the “TEL” or “PHONE” mode, press the off-hook switch.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 319 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
320
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Select “Phonebook” using the tune/scroll knob.
Select the desired name using the knob and press the off-hook
switch.
By pressing (Add S. Dial) and one of the speed dial buttons
(from [1] to [5]) while the desired name is selected, it can
be registered as a speed dial.
Press (A-Z) to display the registered names in alphabetical order
of the initial.
Select “Speed dials” using the tune/scroll knob.
Press the desired preset button (from [1] to [5]) and
press the off-hook switch.
To delete a registered speed dial, after selecting the desired preset
button (from [1] to [5]) press (DELETE) and then
press (YES).
Dialing by selecting a name
Speed dialing
1
2
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 320 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
321
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Select “Dial by number” using the tune/scroll knob.
Enter the phone number and press the off-hook switch.
Select “All Calls”, “Missed Calls”, “Incoming Calls” or “Outgoing
Calls” using the tune/scroll knob.
Select a desired number using the knob and press the off-hook
switch.
The following operations can be performed:
● Registering a number as a speed dial
Press (Add S. Dial) and then press the desired preset button
(from [1] to [5]).
● Deleting the selected number
Press (DELETE) and press (YES).
Dialing by entering the number
Dialing from call histories
1
2
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 321 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
322
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Answering the phone
Press the off-hook switch.
■ Refusing the call
Press the on-hook switch.
■ Receiving a call when on another call
Press the off-hook switch.
Pressing the off-hook switch again returns you to the previous call.
■
Transferring a call
A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system
while dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the follow-
ing methods:
a. Operate the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the operation
of the phone.
b. Press the (PHONE).*
*
: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call from the
cellular phone to the system during a call.
■
Muting your voice
Press (MUTE).
■ Inputting digits
Press (0-9).
Turn the tune/scroll knob to select the number, and then push the
knob.
If tone data is saved, press (SEND) to send the data all at once.
Press
(EXIT) to delete the tone data.
When finished, press (BACK) to return to the previous
screen.
When receiving a phone call
Operations during a call
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 322 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
323
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Setting call volume
To decrease the volume: Turn counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn clockwise.
To decrease the volume: Turn counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn clockwise.
■ When talking on the phone
● Do not talk simultaneously with the other party.
● Keep the volume of the received voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will
increase.
■ Automatic volume adjustment
When vehicle speed is 80 km/h (50 mph) or more, the volume automatically
increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle
speed drops to 70 km/h (43 mph) or less.
■ Phone call system functions
Depending on the cellular phone, certain functions may not be available.
■ Situations where the system may not recognize your voice
● When driving on a rough road
● When driving at high speeds
● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
Adjusting the ring tone volume when receiving a call
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 323 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
324
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Using the “SETUP” menu (“Bluetooth*”
menu)
Press the tune/scroll knob and select “Bluetooth*” using the knob.
Press the knob and select one of the following functions using the
knob.
● Registering a Bluetooth
®
device
“Pairing”
● Listing the registered cellular phones
“List Phone”
● Listing the registered portable players
“List Audio”
● Changing the passkey
“Passkey”
● Setting automatic connection of the device on or off
“BT Power”
● Displaying the device status
“Bluetooth
* info”
● Setting the automatic connection confirmation display to on or off
“Display setting”
● Initialization
“Initialize”
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Registering a Bluetooth
®
device in the system allows the system
to function. The following functions can be used for registered
devices:
Functions and operation procedures
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 324 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
325
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Select “Pairing” using the tune/scroll knob and press the knob.
● If a Bluetooth
®
device is not connected currently
Perform the procedure for registering a Bluetooth
®
device from step
. (→P. 313)
● If other Bluetooth
®
device is connected currently
The Bluetooth
®
device needs to be disconnected.
After disconnecting, perform the procedure for registering a
Bluetooth
®
device from step . (→P. 313)
● If device list is full
Select the Bluetooth
®
device to be deleted using the tune/scroll
knob and press (YES).
Registering a Bluetooth
®
device
3
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 325 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
326
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Select “List Phone” using the tune/scroll knob. The list of registered
cellular phones will be displayed.
● Connecting the registered cellular phone to the audio system
Select the name of the cellular phone to be connected using the
tune/scroll knob.
Select “Select” using the knob.
● Deleting a registered cellular phone
Select the name of the cellular phone to be deleted using the
tune/scroll knob.
Select “Delete” using the knob.
Press (YES).
● Disconnecting the registered cellular phone from the audio system
Select the name of the cellular phone to be disconnected using
the tune/scroll knob.
Select “Disconnect” using the knob.
Press (YES).
Listing the registered cellular phones
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 326 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
327
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Select “List Audio” using the tune/scroll knob. The list of registered
portable players will be displayed.
● Connecting the registered portable player to the audio system
Select the name of the portable player to be connected using the
tune/scroll knob.
Select “Select” using the knob.
● Deleting the registered portable player
Select the name of the portable player to be deleted using the
tune/scroll knob.
Select “Delete” using the knob.
Press (YES).
● Disconnecting the registered portable player from the audio system
Select the name of the portable player to be disconnected using
the tune/scroll knob.
Select “Disconnect” using the knob.
Press (YES).
● Selecting the connection method
Select the name of the desired portable player using the tune/
scroll knob.
Select “Connection method” using the knob.
Select “From vehicle” or “From audio” using the knob.
Listing the registered portable players
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 327 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
328
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Select “Passkey” using the tune/scroll knob.
Select a 4 to 8-digit passkey using the knob.
Input the number 1 digit at a time.
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been
input, press (ENTER).
If the passkey to be registered has 8 digits, pressing (ENTER) is not
necessary.
If “BT Power” is set to on, the registered device will be connected
automatically when the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” position.
Select “BT Power” using the tune/scroll knob.
Select “ON” or “OFF” using the knob.
Changing the passkey
Setting automatic connection of the device on or off
1
2
3
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 328 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
329
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Select “Bluetooth* info” using the tune/scroll knob.
● Displaying the device name
Select “Device name” using the tune/scroll knob.
● Displaying the device address
Select “Device address” using the tune/scroll knob.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
If the “Display setting” is set to on, the portable player connection sta-
tus will be displayed when the engine switch is turned to the “ACC”
position.
Select “Display setting” using the tune/scroll knob.
Select “ON” or “OFF” using the knob.
Displaying the device status
Setting the automatic connection confirmation display to on or
off
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 329 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
330
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Select “Initialize” using the tune/scroll knob.
● Initializing the sound settings
Select “Sound setting” using the tune/scroll knob and press
(YES).
For details about sound settings: →P. 331
● Initializing the device information
Select “Car device info” using the tune/scroll knob and press
(YES).
Automatic connection of a portable device, automatic connection confirma-
tion display and the passkey will be initialized.
● Initializing the all settings
Select “All initialize” using the tune/scroll knob and press
(YES).
■ The number of Bluetooth
®
device that can be registered
Up to 5 Bluetooth
®
device can be registered in the system.
■ Bluetooth
®
audio/phone system functions
Certain functions may not be available during driving.
Initialization
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 330 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
331
5
5-2. Using the audio system
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Using the “SETUP” menu (“TEL” or
“PHONE” menu)
To enter the menu for each function, press the tune/scroll knob and
follow the steps below using the knob:
● Adding a new phone number
1. “TEL” or “PHONE” → 2. “Phonebook” → 3. “Add contacts”
● Setting speed dials
1. “TEL” or “PHONE” → 2. “Phonebook” → 3. “Add SD”
● Deleting call histories
1. “TEL” or “PHONE” → 2. “Phonebook” → 3. “Delete call history”
● Deleting a registered phone number
1. “TEL” or “PHONE” → 2. “Phonebook” → 3. “Delete contacts”
● Deleting another cellular phone’s phonebook
1. “TEL” or “PHONE” → 2. “Phonebook” → 3. “Delete other PB”
● Setting automatic transferring of the phonebook
1. “TEL” or “PHONE” → 2. “Auto transfer”
● Setting call volume
1. “TEL” or “PHONE” → 2. “HF sound setting” → 3. “Call volume”
● Setting ring tone volume
1. “TEL” or “PHONE” → 2. “HF sound setting” → 3. “Ringtone vol-
ume”
● Setting ring tone
1. “TEL” or “PHONE” → 2. “HF sound setting” → 3. “Ringtone”
● Transferring call histories
1. “TEL” or “PHONE” → 2. “Transfer histories”
Functions and operation procedures
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 331 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
332
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Select “Add contacts” using the tune/scroll knob.
● Transferring all contacts from the cellular phone
Select “Overwrite all” using the tune/scroll knob and press
(YES).
● Transferring one contact from the cellular phone
Select “Add one contact” using the tune/scroll knob and press
(YES).
Select “Add SD” using the tune/scroll knob.
Select the desired data using the knob.
Press the desired preset button (from [1] to [5]).
For details about setting speed dials from the call history: →P. 321
For details about deleting speed dials: →P. 320
Adding a new phone number
Setting speed dials
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 332 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
333
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Select “Delete call history” using the tune/scroll knob.
● Deleting outgoing call history
Select “Outgoing Calls” using the tune/scroll knob.
Select the desired phone number using the knob and press
(YES).
To delete all outgoing call history data, press (ALL) and then
press (YES).
● Deleting incoming call history
Select “Incoming Calls” using the tune/scroll knob.
Select the desired phone number using the knob and press
(YES).
To delete all incoming call history data, press (ALL) and then
press (YES).
Deleting call histories
1
2
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 333 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
334
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
● Deleting missed call history
Select “Missed Calls” using the tune/scroll knob.
Select the desired phone number using the knob and press
(YES).
To delete all missed call history data, press (ALL) and then
press (YES).
● Deleting a number from all call histories (Outgoing calls, Incoming
calls and Missed calls)
Select “All Calls” using the tune/scroll knob.
Select the desired phone number using the knob and press
(YES).
To delete all of the call histories data, press (ALL) and then
press (YES).
1
2
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 334 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
335
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Select “Delete contacts” using the tune/scroll knob.
Select the desired phone number using the knob and press
(YES).
To delete all the registered phone numbers, press (ALL) and
then press (YES).
Press (A-Z) to display the registered names in alphabetical order
of the initial.
Select “Delete other PB” using the tune/scroll knob.
Select the desired phonebook using the knob and press
(YES).
Deleting a registered phone number
Deleting another cellular phone’s phonebook
1
2
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 335 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
336
5-2. Using the audio system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Select “Call volume” using the tune/scroll knob.
Change the call volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn the knob counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn the knob clockwise.
To set the volume, press (BACK).
Select “Ringtone volume” using the tune/scroll knob.
Change the ring tone volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn the knob counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn the knob clockwise.
To set the volume, press (BACK).
Setting call volume
Setting ring tone volume
1
2
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 336 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
337
5-2. Using the audio system
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Select “Ringtone” using the tune/scroll knob.
Using the knob, select a ring tone (1 - 3). To set the selected ring
tone, press (BACK).
Select “Transfer histories” using the tune/scroll knob and press
(YES).
■ Phone number
Up to 1000 names can be stored.
■ Call history
Up to 10 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing, incoming and
missed call history memories.
■ Limitation of number of digits
A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.
■ Bluetooth
®
phone system functions
Certain functions may not be available during driving.
Setting ring tone
Transferring call histories
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 337 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
338
5-3. Using the interior lights
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Interior lights list
Interior light (→P. 340)
Personal/interior lights (if equipped) (→P. 339)
Engine switch light (if equipped)
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 338 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
339
5-3. Using the interior lights
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Door position
The personal/interior lights come
on when a door is opened. They
turn off when the doors are closed.
Off
The personal/interior lights can be
individually turned on or off.
On/off
Personal/interior light main switch (if equipped)
1
2
Personal/interior lights (if equipped)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 339 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
340
5-3. Using the interior lights
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
On
Off
Door position
The interior light comes on when a
door is opened. It turns off when
the doors are closed.
■ Illuminated entry system (if equipped)
X Type A
The lights turn on/off automatically with the opening/closing of the doors.
X Type B
The lights automatically turn on/off according to the engine switch position,
whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/
closed.
Interior light
1
2
3
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not
running.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 340 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
341
5
5-4. Using the storage features
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
List of storage features
Bottle holders (if equipped)
(→P. 345)
Console box (if equipped)
(→P. 343)
Cup holders (if equipped)
(→P. 344)
Auxiliary boxes (if equipped)
(→P. 346)
Glove box (→P. 343)
1
2
3
4
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 341 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
342
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
5-4. Using the storage features
CAUTION
■ Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this
may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
● Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact
with other stored items.
● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other
stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas,
causing a fire hazard.
■ When driving or when the storage compartments are not in use
Keep the lids closed.
In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an accident may occur
due to an occupant being struck by an open lid or the items stored inside.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 342 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
343
5-4. Using the storage features
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Open (pull the lever)
Lock with the master key
Unlock with the master key
Lift the lid while pulling up the
knob to release the lock.
Glove box
1
2
3
Console box (if equipped)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 343 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
344
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
5-4. Using the storage features
Cup holders
X Type A (instrument panel)
Pull out the cup holder completely.
Lift the tray up before returning.
X Type B (console box)
(if equipped)
X Type C (console box)
(if equipped)
X Type D (rear console box)
(if equipped)
Pull the lid.
CAUTION
■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or beverage cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of sudden brak-
ing, sudden swerving or an accident, cause injury. If possible, cover hot
drinks to prevent burns.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 344 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
345
5-4. Using the storage features
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ When using the holder as a bottle holder
● When storing a bottle, close the cap.
● The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.
Bottle holders
X For front seats X For rear seats (if equipped)
CAUTION
■ Items unsuitable for the bottle holder
Do not place anything other than a bottle in the bottle holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury.
NOTICE
■ Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders
Do not place open bottles in the bottle holders, or glasses and paper cups
containing liquid. The contents may spill and glasses may break.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 345 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
346
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
5-4. Using the storage features
Auxiliary boxes
X Type A (vehicles without front
passenger airbag)
Press in the lid.
X Type B (if equipped)
Press in the lid.
The auxiliary box is useful for
temporarily storing sunglasses
and similar small items.
X Type C (if equipped) X Type D (if equipped)
CAUTION
■ Items unsuitable for storing (type A)
Do not store items heavier than 0.2 kg (0.4 lb.).
Doing so may cause the auxiliary box to open and the items inside may fall
out, resulting in an accident.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 346 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
347
5
5-4. Using the storage features
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Deck hooks
∗
Raise the hooks when needed.
The deck hooks are provided for
securing loose items.
∗: If equipped
CAUTION
■ When the deck hooks are not in use
To avoid injury, always return the deck hooks to their stowed positions.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 347 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
348
5-5. Other interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Sun visors and vanity mirror
To set the visor in the forward
position, flip it down.
To set the visor in the side posi-
tion, flip down, unhook, and
swing it to the side.
Open the cover to use.
Sun visors
IIN5HI020
1
2
Vanity mirror (if equipped)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 348 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
349
5
5-5. Other interior features
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Clock
Adjusts the hours
Adjusts the minutes
Rounds to the nearest hour
*
*
: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29 → 1:00
1:30 to 1:59 → 2:00
■ The clock is displayed when
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The time display will automatically be set to 1:00.
The clock can be adjusted by pressing the buttons.
1
2
3
X Vehicles without multi-informa-
tion display
X Vehicles with multi-information
display
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 349 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
350
5-5. Other interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Ashtray
Pull the lid.
To remove the ashtray, press down
on the lock spring plate and pull
the lid.
CAUTION
■ When not in use
Keep the ashtray closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerv-
ing, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open
ashtray or ash flying out.
■ To prevent fire
● Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray,
then make sure the ashtray is fully closed.
● Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 350 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
351
5
5-5. Other interior features
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Cigarette lighter
Push the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter will pop up
when it is ready for use.
■ The cigarette lighter can be used when
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
CAUTION
■ To avoid burns or fires
● Do not touch the metal part of the cigarette lighter.
● Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire.
● Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter provided into the cig-
arette lighter outlet. Doing so may deform the outlet and make the ciga-
rette lighter pop out of the outlet or become difficult to take out.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 351 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
352
5-5. Other interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Power outlet
∗
Open the cover.
■ The power outlet can be used when
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
∗: If equipped
The power outlet can be used for 12V accessories that run on
less than 10A.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short cir-
cuit.
■ To prevent blown fuse
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12V 10A.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not
running.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 352 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
353
5
5-5. Other interior features
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Seat heaters
∗
Turns on the front left seat
heater
Turns on the front right seat
heater
The indicator light comes on.
■ The seat heaters can be used when
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■ When not in use
Turn the seat heater off.
∗: If equipped
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 353 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
354
5-5. Other interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ Burns
● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat
heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically chal-
lenged
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping
drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature
of the seat and may lead to overheating.
● Do not use the seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause
minor burns or overheating.
NOTICE
■ To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do
not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Turn the seat heaters off when the engine is not running.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 354 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
355
5
5-5. Other interior features
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Compass
∗
To turn the compass on, press the “INFO.” or “DISP” button until the
compass appears. (→P. 105)
“INFO.” button
Direction display
“H” button
“M” button
“RESET” button
“DISP” button (if equipped)
∗: If equipped
The compass on the multi-information display indicates the
direction in which the vehicle is heading.
Operation
1
2
3
4
5
6
Displays and directions
Display Direction
NNorth
NE Northeast
EEast
SE Southeast
S South
SW Southwest
WWest
NW Northwest
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 355 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
356
5-5. Other interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by
the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies depending
on the geographic position of the vehicle.
If you cross over one of the map boundaries shown in illustration, the com-
pass will deviate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to “Deviation calibra-
tion”.
Calibrating the compass
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 356 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
357
5-5. Other interior features
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Deviation calibration
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “INFO.”
or “DISP” button until a num-
ber (1 to 15) appears on the
clock. Then press the “H” or
“M” button, and referring to
the map above, select the
number of the zone where
you are.
Press the “INFO.” or “DISP” button.
If the direction is displayed for several seconds after adjustment, the
calibration is complete.
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 357 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
358
5-5. Other interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Circling calibration
If the direction display on the
compass flashes, circling cali-
bration needs to be performed.
Stop the vehicle in a place where it is safe to drive in a circle.
Press and hold the “INFO.”
or “DISP” button until a num-
ber (1 to 15) appears on the
clock, and press the
“RESET” button.
“- N -” appears on the direction
display.
Drive the vehicle at 8 km/h (5
mph) or less in a circle until a
direction is displayed.
If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the
block until a direction is dis-
played.
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 358 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
359
5-5. Other interior features
5
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Conditions unfavorable to correct operation
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:
● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
● The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to inter-
ference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under
a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersec-
tion, near a large vehicle, etc.).
● The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the multi-information display.)
● The battery has been disconnected.
● A door is open.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 359 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
360
5-5. Other interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ While driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
■ When doing the circling calibration
Secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the vicinity.
Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.
NOTICE
■ To avoid compass malfunctions
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the multi-information dis-
play.
Doing this may cause the compass sensor to malfunction.
■ To ensure normal operation of the compass
● Do not perform a circling calibration of the compass in a place where the
earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (power windows etc.)
as they may interfere with the calibration.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 360 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
361
5
5-5. Other interior features
Interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Using the steering wheel audio switches
∗
∗: If equipped
Some audio features (audio volume control, radio, CD player
etc.) can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel.
Operation may differ depending on the type of audio system or
navigation system. For details, refer to the manual provided with
the audio system or navigation system.
CAUTION
■ To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 361 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
362
5-5. Other interior features
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 362 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
363
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
6-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior ..........364
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior ...........368
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance
requirements....................371
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service
precautions ......................374
Hood ..................................378
Engine compartment..........380
Tires...................................397
Tire inflation pressure ........400
Wheels...............................402
Air conditioning filter ..........404
Wireless remote
control battery..................406
Checking and
replacing fuses ................409
Light bulbs .........................423
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 363 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
364
6-1. Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle
exterior
● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt
and dust.
● Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly
with water.
● Wipe away any water.
● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
■ Automatic car washes
● Fold the mirrors and remove (vehicles with short pole type antenna) or
retract (vehicles with pillar type antenna) the antenna before washing the
vehicle. Start washing from the front of the vehicle. Make sure to re-install
the antenna (vehicles with short pole type antenna) and extend the mirrors
before driving.
● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and
harm your vehicle’s paint.
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in
prime condition:
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 364 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
365
6-1. Maintenance and care
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ High pressure car washes
● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of
the windows.
● Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is
closed properly.
■ Aluminum wheels (if equipped)
● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard
brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical clean-
ers.
Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
● Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after
driving for long distance in the hot weather.
● Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
■ Bumpers
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 365 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
366
6-1. Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ When washing the vehicle
Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may
cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire.
■ Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has
cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
NOTICE
■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and compo-
nents (aluminum wheels etc.)
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface
• If dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings are present on the
paint surface
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,
iron powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled with dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place
with low humidity when storing the wheels.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 366 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
367
6-1. Maintenance and care
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
● Do not apply wax to the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■ Antenna installation and removal precautions (vehicles with short pole
type antenna)
● Before driving, ensure that the antenna is installed.
● When the antenna is removed, such as before entering an automatic car
wash, make sure to store it in a suitable place so as not to lose it. Also,
before driving, make sure to reinstall the antenna in its original position.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 367 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
368
6-1. Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle
interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces
with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe off any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off
all remaining traces of detergent.
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining
moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded and ventilated area.
● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge
or soft cloth.
● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and
wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior
and keep it in top condition:
Protecting the vehicle interior
Cleaning the leather areas
Cleaning the synthetic leather areas
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 368 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
369
6-1. Maintenance and care
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Caring for leather areas
Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to
maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge
or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water.
Wipe dirty surfaces and let them dry. Excellent results are obtained by keep-
ing the carpet as dry as possible.
■ Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also
check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.
Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch
fire.
● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(→P. 52)
An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function
properly, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect
off the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 369 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
370
6-1. Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
● Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehi-
cle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:
• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline,
alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, and bleach
• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alco-
hol
● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other
interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.
■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces:
● Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.
Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the uphol-
stery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats
up significantly.
■ Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes
into contact with electrical components such as the audio system above or
under the floor of the vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window (vehicles with rear window
defogger)
● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause
damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened
with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in
strokes running parallel to the heater wires.
● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 370 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
371
6
6-2. Maintenance
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Maintenance requirements
Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals
according to the maintenance schedule.
For full details of your maintenance schedule, refer to the “Toyota Service
Booklet” or “Toyota Warranty Booklet”.
What about do-it-yourself maintenance?
Many maintenance items are easy to do yourself if you have a little
mechanical ability and a few basic automotive tools.
Note, however, that some maintenance tasks require special tools and
skills. These are best performed by qualified technicians. Even if you’re an
experienced do-it-yourself mechanic, we recommend that repairs and
maintenance be conducted by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional. Any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer will keep a record of maintenance, which could be useful
should you ever require Warranty Service. Should you choose to select a
qualified and equipped professional other than an authorized Toyota
repairer to service or maintain your vehicle, we recommend that you
request that a record of maintenance be kept.
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and reg-
ular maintenance are essential. Toyota recommends the follow-
ing maintenance:
Scheduled maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 371 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
372
6-2. Maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Where to go for maintenance service?
In order to maintain your vehicle in the best possible condition, Toyota recom-
mends that maintenance service operations as well as other inspections and
repairs be carried out by authorized Toyota dealers or repairers or other duly
qualified and equipped professionals. For repairs and services covered by
your warranty, please visit an authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, who will
use genuine Toyota parts in repairing any difficulties you may encounter.
There can also be advantages in utilizing authorized Toyota dealers or repair-
ers for non-warranty repairs and services, as members of the Toyota network
will be able to expertly assist you with any difficulties you may encounter.
Your Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional will perform all of the scheduled maintenance on your vehicle reliably
and economically due to their experience with Toyota vehicles.
■ Does your vehicle need repairs?
Be on the alert for changes in performance and sounds, and visual tip-offs
that indicate service is needed. Some important clues are:
● Engine missing, stumbling or pinging
● Appreciable loss of power
● Strange engine noises
● A fluid leak under the vehicle (However, water dripping from the air condi-
tioning system after use is normal.)
● Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide
leak. Drive with the windows open and have the exhaust system checked
immediately.)
● Flat-looking tires, excessive tire squeal when cornering, uneven tire wear
● Vehicle pulls to one side when driven straight on a level road
● Strange noises related to suspension movement
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling brake pedal or clutch pedal,
pedal almost touches the floor, vehicle pulls to one side when braking
● Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal
If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional as
soon as possible. Your vehicle may need adjustment or repair.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 372 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
373
6-2. Maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ If your vehicle is not properly maintained
Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and
possible serious injury or death.
■ Handling of the battery
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after
handling. (→P. 390)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 373 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
374
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself, be sure to follow the
correct procedure as given in these sections.
Items Parts and tools
Battery condition (→P. 390)
•Warm water
• Baking soda
• Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
• Distilled water
Engine coolant level (→P. 387)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or a similar high quality ethylene
glycol-based non-silicate, non-
amine, non-nitrite and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid
organic acid technology
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and
50% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding cool-
ant)
Engine oil level (→P. 383)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine oil)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 374 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
375
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Fuses (→P. 409)
• Fuse with same amperage rating
as original
Light bulbs (→P. 423)
• Bulb with same number and watt-
age rating as original
• Phillips-head screwdriver
• Wrench
Radiator, condenser and
intercooler (if equipped) (→P. 389)
Tire inflation pressure (→P. 400)
• Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
Washer fluid (→P. 394)
• Water or washer fluid containing
antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel (used only for adding
water or washer fluid)
Items Parts and tools
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 375 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
376
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may
move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death
or serious injury, observe the following precautions.
■ When working on the engine compartment
● Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine
drive belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right
after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper and rags, in the
engine compartment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the bat-
tery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.
● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
● Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage
painted surfaces. If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the
affected area with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, consult a doctor.
■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc.
from getting in your eyes.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 376 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
377
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner filter
Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear
due to dirt in the air.
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads
wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 377 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
378
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Hood
Pull the hood lock release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Pull up the auxiliary catch lever
and lift the hood.
Hold the hood open by inserting
the supporting rod into the slot.
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 378 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
379
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion
and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
■ After installing the support rod into the slot
Make sure the rod supports the hood securely from falling down on to your
head or body.
NOTICE
■ When closing the hood
Be sure to return the support rod to its clip before closing the hood. Closing
the hood with the support rod up could cause the hood to bend.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 379 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
380
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Engine compartment
X Gasoline engine
Engine coolant reservoir
(→P. 387)
Engine oil level dipstick
(→P. 383)
Engine oil filler cap (→P. 384)
Fuse box (→P. 409)
Battery (→P. 390)
Washer fluid tank (→P. 394)
Condenser (→P. 389)
Radiator (→P. 389)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 380 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
381
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Diesel engine (left-hand drive vehicles)
Battery (if equipped)
(→P. 390)
Engine coolant reservoir
(→P. 387)
Intercooler (→P. 389)
Engine oil filler cap (→P. 384)
Engine oil level dipstick
(→P. 383)
Fuel filter (→P. 396, 485)
Fuse box (→P. 409)
Battery (→P. 390)
Washer fluid tank (→P. 394)
Condenser (→P. 389)
Radiator (→P. 389)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 381 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
382
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Diesel engine (right-hand drive vehicles)
Engine coolant reservoir
(→P. 387)
Intercooler (→P. 389)
Engine oil filler cap (→P. 384)
Engine oil level dipstick
(→P. 383)
Fuel filter (→P. 396, 485)
Battery (if equipped)
(→P. 390)
Fuse box (→P. 409)
Battery (→P. 390)
Washer fluid tank (→P. 394)
Condenser (→P. 389)
Radiator (→P. 389)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 382 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
383
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■ Checking the engine oil
Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine
and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain
back into the bottom of the engine.
Remove the sand and dust from around the dipstick.
Holding a rag under the end,
pull the dipstick out.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Make sure that the inlet of the oil level gauge guide and O-ring of the
dipstick are free from sand and dust.
If the O-ring is damaged, replace it with a new one.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the
oil level.
Low
Normal
Excessive
The shape of the dipstick may
differ depending on the type
of vehicle or engine.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Engine oil
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
7
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 383 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
384
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near
the low level mark, add engine
oil of the same type as that
already in the engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed
before adding oil.
*: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label or plate.
(→P. 494)
Remove the sand and dust from around the oil filler cap.
Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.
Engine oil selection →P. 500
Oil quantity
(Low → Full)
Gasoline engine 1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 Imp.qt.)
Diesel engine
X For Russia, Ukraine and
KUN25L-PRMDH models
*
1.6 L (1.7 qt., 1.4 Imp.qt.)
X Except for Russia, Ukraine and
KUN25L-PRMDH models
*
1.4 L (1.5 qt., 1.2 Imp.qt.)
Items Clean funnel
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 384 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
385
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Engine oil consumption
A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following
situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be
refilled in between oil maintenance intervals.
● When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or
after replacing the engine
● If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used
● When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, when towing, or
when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently
● When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently
through heavy traffic
■ After changing the engine oil (diesel engine except for KUN25L-PRMDH
model
*)
The engine oil maintenance data should be reset. Perform the following pro-
cedures:
Switch the display to the trip meter A (→P. 102) when the engine switch is
in the “ON” position.
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position.
While pressing the odometer/trip meter display change button (→P. 102),
turn the engine switch to the “ON” position (do not start the engine because
reset mode will be canceled). Continue to press and hold the button for
more than one second after the trip meter displays “000000”.
*: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label or plate.
(→P. 494)
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 385 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
386
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation and skin cancer, so care
should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used
engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do
not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the
ground. Call any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional, service station or auto parts store for
information concerning recycling or disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 386 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
387
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the upper and lower
lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
Upper line
Lower line
If the level is on or below the lower line, add coolant up to the upper line.
(→P. 482)
■ Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with
long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deion-
ized water. (Minimum temperature: -35°C [-31°F])
For more details about engine coolant, contact any authorized Toyota dealer
or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
■ If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir caps, drain cock
and water pump. If you cannot find a leak, have any authorized Toyota dealer
or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional test the cap
and check for leaks in the cooling system.
Engine coolant
1
2
3
X Gasoline engine X Diesel engine
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 387 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
388
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ When the engine is hot
Do not remove the engine coolant reservoir cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the
cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
NOTICE
■ When adding coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of
water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion
protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.
■ Notice on coolant quality
Do not use improper coolant. If improper coolant is used, the engine cooling
system may be damaged.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 388 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
389
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Check the radiator, condenser and intercooler and clear away any for-
eign objects. If any of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not
sure of their condition, have your vehicle inspected by any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
Radiator, condenser and intercooler (if equipped)
CAUTION
■ When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator, condenser or intercooler as they may be hot and
cause serious injuries, such as burns.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 389 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
390
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Check the battery as follows.
■ Caution symbols
The meanings of each caution symbol on the top of the battery are
as follows:
■ Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that
there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Ter m i na ls
Hold-down clamp
Battery
No smoking, no naked
flames, no sparks
Battery acid
Shield eyes
Note operating
instructions
Keep away from
children
Explosive gas
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 390 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
391
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Checking battery fluid
Check that the level is between the upper and lower lines.
Upper line
Lower line
If the fluid level is at or below the
lower line, add distilled water.
■
Adding distilled water
Remove the vent plug.
Add distilled water.
If the upper line cannot be seen,
check the fluid level by looking
directly at the cell.
Put the vent plug back on and close it securely.
1
2
1
Low O.K.
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 391 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
392
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Therefore, observe the following before recharging:
● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect
the ground cable.
● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and dis-
connecting the charger cables to the battery.
CAUTION
■ Chemicals in the battery
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce
hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death
or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the
battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
● Keep children away from the battery.
■ Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a
garage or closed room where there is insufficient ventilation.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 392 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
393
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical
attention immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the cloth-
ing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention
immediately.
NOTICE
■ When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.
■ When adding distilled water
Avoid overfilling. Water spilled during battery recharging may cause corro-
sion.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 393 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
394
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Vehicles without washer fluid level gauge
If any washer does not work, the
washer tank may be empty. Add
washer fluid.
X Vehicles with washer fluid level gauge
If the washer fluid level is at
“LOW”, add washer fluid.
■ Using the gauge (if equipped)
Washer fluid
The washer fluid level can be checked
by observing the position of the level on
the liquid-covered holes in the gauge.
If the level falls below the second hole
from the bottom (the “LOW” position),
refill the washer fluid.
Current
fluid level
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 394 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
395
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ When adding washer fluid
Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid
contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bot-
tle.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 395 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
396
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
You may drain the fuel filter yourself. However, as the operation is dif-
ficult, we recommend having it drained by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional. Even if you decide to drain it yourself, contact any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
The water in the fuel filter needs to be drained if the buzzer sounds (if
equipped) and the fuel system warning light flashes. (→P. 451)
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position.
Place a small tray under the drain plug or drain hose to catch the
water and any fuel that comes out.
Perform the draining as shown in the illustration.
Turn the drain plug counter-
clockwise about 2 to 2 1/2
turns.
Loosening more than this will
cause water oozing from around
the drain plug.
Operate the priming pump
until fuel begins to run out.
After draining, tighten the drain plug by hand.
Fuel filter (diesel engine only)
1
2
3
1
2
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 396 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
397
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear indica-
tors is shown by the “TWI” or “∆”
marks, etc., molded on the sidewall
of each tire.
Check spare tire condition and
pressure if not rotated.
X Vehicles with spare tire of a different wheel type from the installed
tires
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and help
extend tire life, Toyota recom-
mends that tire rotation is carried
out approximately every 10000 km
(6000 miles).
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance sched-
ules and treadwear.
Checking tires
1
2
3
Tire rotation
Front
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 397 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
398
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Vehicles with spare tire of the same wheel type as the installed tires
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and help
extend tire life, Toyota recom-
mends that tire rotation is carried
out approximately every 10000 km
(6000 miles).
■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose
the fabric, and bulges indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or
location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
■ Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it
has seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■ If the tread on snow tires wears down below 4 mm (0.16 in.)
The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.
Front
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 398 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
399
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train as well as
dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting
in death or serious injury.
● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.
● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply
tires).
● Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.
● Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.
Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.
NOTICE
■ Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the
cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause
damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■ If tire inflation pressure of each tire becomes low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 399 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
400
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Tire inflation pressure
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel efficiency
● Reduced driving comfort and tire life
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or has not been driven
for more than 1.5 km or 1 mile, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation
pressure reading.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pres-
sure that is even just a few pounds off can affect ride quality and handling.
● Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for tire inflation
pressure to be higher after driving.
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is bal-
anced.
Make sure to maintain proper tire inflation pressure. Tire infla-
tion pressure should be checked at least once per month. How-
ever, Toyota recommends that tire inflation pressure be checked
once every two weeks. (→P. 513)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 400 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
401
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may
occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury:
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Poor sealing of the tire bead
● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause
air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps are lost, replace
them as soon as possible.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 401 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
402
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Wheels
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are
equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width and
inset
*.
Replacement wheels are available at any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Toyota does not recommend using the following:
● Wheels of different sizes or types
● Used wheels
● Bent wheels that have been straightened
● Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with
your aluminum wheels.
● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1600 km (1000 miles).
● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire
chains.
● Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plas-
tic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be
replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or
cause a loss of handling control.
Wheel selection
Aluminum wheel precautions (if equipped)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 402 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
403
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the
Owner’s Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tube-
less tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious
injury.
■ When installing the wheel nuts
● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,
leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can
cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an acci-
dent and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or grease
from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
■ Use of defective wheels prohibited
Do not use cracked or deformed wheels.
Doing so could cause the tire to leak air during driving, possibly causing an
accident.
● Be sure to install the wheel nuts with the
tapered ends facing inward. Installing
the nuts with the tapered ends facing
outward can cause the wheel to break
and eventually cause the wheel to come
off while driving, which could lead to an
accident resulting in death or serious
injury.
Tapered
portion
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 403 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
404
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Air conditioning filter
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position.
Open the glove box.
Push in each side of the glove
box to disconnect the claws.
Remove the filter cover.
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain
air conditioning efficiency.
Removal method
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 404 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
405
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Remove the air conditioning fil-
ter and replace it with a new
one.
The “↑UP” marks shown on the fil-
ter should be pointing up.
■ Changing interval
Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance
schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement
may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the
“Toyota Service Booklet” or “Toyota Warranty Booklet”.)
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
5
NOTICE
■ When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the
system.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 405 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
406
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Wireless remote control battery
∗
● Flathead screwdriver
● Lithium battery CR2016
Remove the cover.
To prevent damage to the key,
cover the tip of the screwdriver with
a rag.
Remove the module.
∗: If equipped
Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.
You will need the following items:
Replacing the battery
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 406 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
407
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Remove the battery cover and
the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the “+”
terminal facing up.
■ Use a CR2016 lithium battery
● Batteries can be purchased at any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional, local electrical appliance
shops or camera stores.
● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manu-
facturer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.
■ If the key battery is depleted
The following symptoms may occur:
● The wireless remote control will not function properly.
● The operational range will be reduced.
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 407 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
408
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ Removed battery and other parts
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking.
Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious
injury.
■ Certification for the key battery
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT
TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE
INSTRUCTIONS
NOTICE
■ For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 408 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
409
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Checking and replacing fuses
Turn the engine switch off.
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings”
(→P. 414) for details about which fuse to check.
Open the fuse box cover.
X Engine compartment
Push the tab in and lift the lid off.
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may
have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as nec-
essary.
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 409 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
410
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Driver’s side instrument panel for left-hand drive vehicles (front and
rear sides)
Remove the lower instrument
panel.
Rear side: Inspection and replace-
ment of the fuses, contact any
authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional.
X Driver’s side instrument panel for right-hand drive vehicles (front
and rear sides)
Remove the lower instrument
panel.
Rear side: Inspection and replace-
ment of the fuses, contact any
authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 410 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
411
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Passenger’s side instrument panel for left-hand drive vehicles
Open the glove box. Push in each
side of the glove box to discon-
nect the claws.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 411 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
412
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Passenger’s side instrument panel for right-hand drive vehicles
Open the glove box. Push in each
side of the glove box to discon-
nect the claws.
Remove the fuse.
Type A and B fuses can be
removed using the pullout tool.
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 412 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
413
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Check if the fuse is blown.
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Type A, B and C:
Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rat-
ing. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.
Type D, E and F:
Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional.
5
1
2
X Type A X Type B
X Type C X Type D
X Type E X Type F
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 413 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
414
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
The provision of fuses and systems connected to the circuit may differ
depending on the model and specification.
X Engine compartment
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1 SPARE 25 A Spare fuse
2 SPARE 15 A Spare fuse
3 SPARE 10 A Spare fuse
4 FOG 7.5 A Front fog lights
5 HORN 10 A Horn
6 EFI 25 A
Multiport fuel injection system/sequential
multiport fuel injection system
7 PTC NO.1 50 A Power heater
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 414 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
415
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Fuse Ampere Circuit
8 PWR SEAT 30 A Power seat
9 PTC NO.2 50 A Power heater
10
RR CLR*
1
40 A No circuit
H-LP CLN*
2
40 A Headlight cleaners
11 FR HTR 50 A Air conditioning system, A/C
12 ABS NO.2 30 A ABS, TRC, VSC
13 ABS NO.1 40 A ABS, TRC, VSC
14 ALT 100 A
Charging system, PWR SEAT, RR CLR,
H-LP CLN, FR HTR, AM1, IG1, PTC
NO.1, PTC NO.2, PWR OUT, STOP,
TAIL, OBD
15 GLOW 80 A Engine glow system
16 BATT P/I 50 A FOG, HORN, EFI
17 AM2 30 A Engine starter, ST, IGN, INJ, MET
18 MAIN 40 A H-LP RH, H-LP LH, H-LP RL, H-LP LL
19 A/PUMP 50 A Emission control system
20 H-LP RL 15 A Right-hand headlight (low beam)
21 H-LP LL 15 A Left-hand headlight (low beam)
22 H-LP RH 15 A
Right-hand headlight (high beam), right-
hand headlight (low beam)
23 H-LP LH 15 A
Left-hand headlight (high beam), left-
hand headlight (low beam)
24 EFI No.2 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential
multiport fuel injection system
25 ECU-IG-NO.2 10 A
Charging system, air conditioning sys-
tem, ABS, VSC, headlight cleaners
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 415 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
416
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
*
1
: For TGN26L-PRMDK and KUN25L-PRMDH models*
3
*
2
: Except for TGN26L-PRMDK and KUN25L-PRMDH models*
3
*
3
: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label or plate.
(
→P. 494)
26 ECU-B 10 A
Door courtesy switches, power door lock
system, wireless remote control system,
steering sensor, headlights
27 RAD 20 A Audio system
28 DOME 7.5 A
Interior lights, engine switch light, per-
sonal light, gauges and meters, clock,
multi-information display, wireless remote
control system, daytime running light sys-
tem, fog light
29 A/F 20 A Emission control system
30 ETCS 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential
multiport fuel injection system
31 ALT-S 7.5 A Charging system
32 TURN-HAZ 15 A Emergency flashers and turn signal lights
33 SIREN 7.5 A SIREN
34 ECU-B No.2 7.5 A Air conditioning system
35 DCC 30 A ECU-B, DOME, RAD
Fuse Ampere Circuit
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 416 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
417
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Driver’s side instrument panel (front side)
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1 PWR OUT 15 A Power outlet
2 TAIL 10 A
Instrument panel light, front fog lights,
manual headlight leveling dial, front posi-
tion lights, tail lights, license plate lights,
multiport fuel injection system/sequential
multiport fuel injection system, multi-
information display, daytime running light
system, automatic headlight system
3 STOP 10 A
Stop lights, high mounted stoplight, multi-
port fuel injection system/ sequential mul-
tiport fuel injection system, ABS, TRC,
VSC, shift lock control system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 417 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
418
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
4 OBD 7.5 A On-board diagnosis system
5 INJ 15 A
Multiport fuel injection system/sequential
multiport fuel injection system
6
ECU-IG &
GAUGE
10 A
Air conditioning system, charging sys-
tem, rear differential lock system, ABS,
TRC, VSC, emergency flashers, turn sig-
nal lights, back-up lights, multiport fuel
injection system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system, shift lock control sys-
tem, rear window defogger, headlights,
door courtesy switches, power door lock
system, wireless remote control system,
steering sensor, daytime running light
system, cruise control, headlight clean-
ers, seat heaters, outside rear view mir-
ror defoggers, multi-information display,
passenger’s seat belt reminder light
7 WIP 20 A Windshield wiper and washer
8 IGN 7.5 A
Multiport fuel injection system/sequential
multiport fuel injection system, SRS air-
bags, fuel pump
9 ACC 7.5 A
Audio system, power outlet, clock, power
rear view mirror control system, shift lock
control system, multi-information display
Fuse Ampere Circuit
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 418 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
419
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
10 CIG 15 A Cigarette lighter
11 MET 7.5 A Gauges and meters, DPF system
12 A/C 10 A Air conditioning system
13 ST 7.5 A
Starting system, gauges and meters,
multiport fuel injection system/sequential
multiport fuel injection system
Fuse Ampere Circuit
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 419 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
420
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Driver’s side instrument panel (rear side)
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1 AM1 40 A
Rear differential lock system, ABS, TRC,
VSC, ACC, CIG, ECU-IG & GAUGE, WIP
2 IG1 40 A
PWR, S-HTR, 4WD, DOOR, DEF, MIR
HTR
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 420 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
421
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Passenger’s side instrument panel
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1 MIR-HTR 15 A Outside rear view mirror defoggers
2 4WD 20 A
Rear differential lock system, ABS, TRC,
VSC
3 S-HTR 15 A Seat heaters
4 DEF 20 A
Rear window defogger, multiport fuel
injection system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
5 DOOR 25 A Power door lock system, power windows
6 PWR 30 A Power windows
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 421 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
422
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ After a fuse is replaced
● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may
need replacement. (→P. 423)
● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional.
■ If there is an overload in a circuit
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
CAUTION
■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or
injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than that indicated, or use
any other object in place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
● Do not modify the fuses or fuse boxes.
NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped
professional as soon as possible.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 422 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
423
6
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Light bulbs
Check the wattage of the light bulb to be replaced. (→P. 516)
■ Front
*: If equipped
You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty
level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary
bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact any autho-
rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-
fied and equipped professional.
Preparing for light bulb replacement
Bulb locations
Side turn signal light*
(fender-mounted type)
Headlight
Front fog light
*
Front turn signal light
Front position light
1
2
3
4
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 423 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
424
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Rear
*: If equipped
■
Headlight
Before replacing the bulbs
(right side only):
Release the clips of the air
cleaner filter cover, and
remove the cover to allow
easy access to the light
bulbs.
Stop/tail lights
Rear fog light
*
(left-hand drive vehicles)
or back-up light
Rear turn signal light
License plate
lights
Rear fog light
*
(right-hand drive vehicles)
or back-up light
1
2
3
4
5
Replacing light bulbs
1
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 424 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
425
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Unplug the connector and
remove the rubber cover.
Release the bulb retaining
spring.
Remove the bulb.
To install a new bulb, align the
tabs of the bulb with the cutouts
of the mounting hole.
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 425 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
426
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Front position lights
To allow enough working
space, turn the steering
wheel to the opposite side of
the bulb to be replaced.
Remove the bolts and clip.
Removing the clip
Installing the clip
1
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 426 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
427
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Partly remove the fender
liner and turn the bulb base
counterclockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
Bumper
Fender
liner
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 427 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
428
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Front turn signal lights
To allow enough working
space, turn the steering
wheel to the opposite side of
the bulb to be replaced.
Remove the bolts and clip.
Removing the clip
Installing the clip
1
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 428 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
429
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Partly remove the fender
liner and turn the bulb base
counterclockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
Bumper
Fender
liner
2
ITO43P144
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 429 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
430
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Side turn signal lights (fender-mounted type) (if equipped)
Remove the unit.
Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
Front
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 430 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
431
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Front fog lights (if equipped)
To allow enough working
space, turn the steering
wheel to the opposite side of
the bulb to be replaced.
Remove the bolts and clip.
Removing the clip
Installing the clip
1
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 431 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
432
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Partly remove the fender
liner and unplug the connec-
tor while pressing the lock
release.
Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
Bumper
Fender
liner
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 432 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
433
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Stop/tail lights, rear turn signal lights and back-up lights or
rear fog light (if equipped)
Remove the securing bolts
and remove the unit.
Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
Stop/tail light
Rear turn signal light
Back-up light or rear fog
light
Remove the light bulb.
Stop/tail light
Rear turn signal light
Back-up light or rear fog
light
1
2
1
2
3
3
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 433 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
434
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
License plate lights
Remove the unit.
Turn the bulb base counter-
clockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
1
2
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 434 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
435
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
6
Maintenance and care
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Replacing the following bulbs
If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional.
● Side turn signal lights (mirror-mounted type) (if equipped)
● High mounted stoplight (if equipped)
■ When installing the rubber cover of the headlight
Ensure the rubber cover is securely attached.
■ LED lights
The high mounted stoplight consists of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs
burn out, take your vehicle to any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional to have the light replaced.
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not
indicate a malfunction. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional for more information in the
following situations:
● Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.
Fit the rubber cover outer circumfer-
ence in firmly.
Fit the rubber cover around the light
bulb in until the light bulb plug can be
seen.
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 435 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
436
6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after
turning off the lights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is
unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth
to avoid getting moisture and oils on the bulb.
Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so
may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This
may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
● Do not attempt to repair or disassemble light bulbs, connectors, electric
circuits or component parts.
Doing so may result in death or serious injury due to electric shock.
■ To prevent damage or fire
● Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
● Check the wattage of the bulb before installing to prevent heat damage.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 436 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
437
7
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
7-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers...........438
If your vehicle has to
be stopped in an
emergency.......................439
7-2. Steps to take in an
emergency
If your vehicle needs
to be towed ......................441
If you think something is
wrong...............................446
Fuel pump shut off
system .............................447
If a warning light turns on
or a warning buzzer
sounds .............................448
If you have a flat tire ..........456
If the engine will not
start..................................476
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P .............477
If the vehicle battery is
discharged .......................478
If your vehicle overheats....482
If you run out of fuel
and the engine stalls
(diesel engine only) .........485
If the vehicle becomes
stuck ................................486
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 437 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
438
7-1. Essential information
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Emergency flashers
Press the switch.
All the turn signal lights will flash.
To turn them off, press the switch once again.
■ Emergency flashers
If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not
operating, the battery may discharge.
The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the
vehicle has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.
X Vehicles without automatic air
conditioning system
X Vehicles with automatic air
conditioning system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 438 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
439
7
7-1. Essential information
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an
emergency
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort
required to slow the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to N.
X If the shift lever is shifted to N
After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
Stop the engine.
X If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle
speed as much as possible.
Stop the engine by turning the
engine switch to the “ACC”
position.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop
the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the follow-
ing procedure:
1
2
3
4
3
4
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 439 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
440
7-1. Essential information
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ If the engine has to be turned off while driving
● Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the
brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn.
Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.
● Never attempt to remove the key, as doing so will lock the steering wheel.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 440 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
441
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
If your vehicle needs to be towed
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional or commercial towing service before towing.
● The engine is running but the vehicle will not move.
● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Do not tow with a sling-type truck
to prevent body damage.
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle
towed by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another
duly qualified and equipped professional or commercial towing
service, using a lift-type truck or flatbed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/
provincial and local laws.
Situations needs to contact dealers before towing
Towing with a sling-type truck
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 441 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
442
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X From the front
Vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion: Use a towing dolly under the
rear wheels.
Vehicles with manual transmis-
sion: We recommend using a tow-
ing dolly under the rear wheels.
When not using a towing dolly,
release the parking brake and shift
the shift lever to N.
X From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the front
wheels.
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45°.
Do not overly tighten the tie
downs or the vehicle may be dam-
aged.
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck
Using a flatbed truck
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 442 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
443
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
7
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
If a tow truck is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency
towing eyelets. This should only
be attempted on hard surfaced
roads for 80 km (50 miles) at low
speeds.
A driver must be in the vehicle to
steer and operate the brakes. The
vehicle’s wheels, drive train,
axles, steering and brakes must
be in good condition.
Securely attach a cable or chain to the towing eyelet.
Take care not to damage the vehicle body.
Enter the vehicle being towed and start the engine.
If the engine does not start, turn the engine switch to the “ON” position.
4WD models: Shift the front drive control lever to H2. (→P. 226)
Shift the shift lever to N and release the parking brake.
When the shift lever cannot be shifted (automatic transmission):
→P. 4 7 7
Emergency towing
Emergency towing procedure
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 443 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
444
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ While towing
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will
not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
■ When towing the vehicle
■ While towing
● When towing using cables or chains, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place
excessive stress on the towing eyelets, cables or chains. The towing eye-
lets, cables or chains may become damaged, broken debris may hit peo-
ple and cause serious damage.
● Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position.
There is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and cannot be oper-
ated.
Pre Runner (2WD models): Be sure to
transport the vehicle with all four wheels
raised off the ground. If the vehicle is
towed with the tires contacting the
ground, the drivetrain and related parts
may be damaged or an accident may
occur due to a change in direction of the
vehicle.
4WD models: Be sure to transport the
vehicle with all four wheels raised off the
ground. If the vehicle is towed with the
tires contacting the ground, the drivetrain
and related parts may be damaged, and
the vehicle may fly off the truck.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 444 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
445
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
7
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type
truck
Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the engine switch is in the
“LOCK” position or the key is removed. The steering lock mechanism is not
strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.
■ To prevent body damage when towing with a sling-type truck
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 445 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
446
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
If you think something is wrong
● Fluid leaks under the vehicle.
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher
than normal.
● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the engine
● Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly
● Appreciable loss of power
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches
the floor
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle proba-
bly needs adjustment or repair. Contact any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional as soon as possible.
Visible symptoms
Audible symptoms
Operational symptoms
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 446 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
447
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Fuel pump shut off system
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is
activated.
Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
Restart the engine.
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or
when an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off
system stops the supply of fuel to the engine.
NOTICE
■ Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been
damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 447 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
448
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
If a warning light turns on or a warning
buzzer sounds
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake sys-
tem. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and
equipped professional.
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights
comes on or flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then
goes off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the
system. However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle
inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle
may be dangerous.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Brake system warning light
• Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is
fully released the system is operating normally.
• Low negative pressure in the vacuum tank (diesel
engine)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 448 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
449
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
7
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehi-
cle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to
the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional immedi-
ately.
Stop the vehicle immediately.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system
Low engine oil pressure warning light
Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low
Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional
immediately.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates:
• Malfunction in the emission control system. (if equipped)
• Malfunction in the electronic engine control system.
• The boost pressure in the turbocharger is abnormally
high.
*
1
(diesel engine)
• Malfunction in DPF system. (if equipped)
SRS warning light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 449 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
450
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
ABS warning light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The ABS; or
• The brake assist system (vehicles with VSC system)
Slip indicator light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in:
• Vehicle stability control; or
• Traction control
(flashes)
Four-wheel drive indicator light (4WD models)
Indicates a malfunction in the four-wheel drive system
(→P. 226)
Cruise control indicator light*
2
(if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system
(→P. 214)
Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light
(if equipped)
Indicates that the automatic transmission fluid tempera-
ture is too high.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place, shift the shift lever to P
and wait until the light goes off. If the light goes off, you
may start the vehicle again. If the light dose not go off,
contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Timing belt replacement warning light (diesel engine)
Indicates that the timing belt should be replaced
Warning light Warning light/Details
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 450 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
451
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
7
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
*
1
: Slow down until the lamp goes off.
*
2
: The light turns to yellow (except for Russia and Ukraine) or flashes (for
Russia and Ukraine).
*
3
: For KUN25L-PRMDH models*
4
:
The buzzer will sound at the same time the warning light flashes.
*
4
: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label or plate.
(→P. 494)
Fuel system warning light (diesel engine) (warning
buzzer)
*
3
Indicates:
• The amount of accumulated water in the fuel filter has
reached the specified level if the light flashes. (→P. 396)
• The fuel filter need to be replaced if the light comes on.
DPF system warning light (if equipped)
Indicates:
• Vehicles without DPF system switch: The amount of
accumulated deposit in the DPF catalytic converter has
reached the specified level if the light comes on. Regen-
erate the filter. (→P. 454)
• Vehicles without DPF system switch: Malfunction in the
DPF system if the light flashes.
• Vehicles with DPF system switch: Regenerate the filter
with the DPF system switch if the light turns on or
flashes. (→P. 238)
Warning light Warning light/Details
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 451 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
452
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light goes off.
Follow the correction procedures.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
Open door warning light
Indicates that a door is not
fully closed
Check that all the doors are
closed.
Low fuel level warning
light
X Except for TGN26L-
PRMDK and KUN25L-
PRMDH models
*
1
Indicates remaining fuel is
approximately 12.0 L (3.2
gal., 2.6 Imp.gal.) or less
X For TGN26L-PRMDK
and KUN25L-PRMDH
models
*
1
Indicates remaining fuel is
approximately 11.4 L (3.0
gal., 2.5 Imp.gal.) or less
Refuel the vehicle.
(for driver)
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light (warning buzzer)
*
2
(if
equipped)
Warns the driver to fasten
his/her seat belt
Fasten the seat belt.
(for front
passenger)
Front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light (if
equipped)
Warns the front passenger
to fasten his/her seat belt
Fasten the seat belt.
Unengaged “Park” warn-
ing light (if equipped)
The transmission “Park”
mechanism is not
engaged.
Shift front drive control lever
to “H2” or “H4” or “L4”.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 452 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
453
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
7
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
*
1
: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label or plate.
(→P. 494)
*
2
: Driver’s seat belt buzzer:
The driver’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat
belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds intermittently for 30 seconds after
the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 km/h (9 mph). Then, if the seat belt is
still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 90 more sec-
onds.
*
3
: Except for KUN25L-PRMDH model*
1
Low engine oil level warn-
ing light (diesel engine)
*
3
Indicates that engine oil
level is low
Check the level of engine oil
and add more oil if neces-
sary.
(remains on)
Engine oil change
reminder light (diesel
engine)
*
3
X Except for Russia and
Ukraine
Indicates that the engine
oil should be changed
Comes on approximately
30000 km (18000 miles)
after the engine oil has
been changed (and the oil
maintenance data has
been reset)
X For Russia and Ukraine
You have forgotten to reset
the oil change system
Change the engine oil in
accordance with the main-
tenance schedule.
Have the engine oil and oil
filter checked and/or
changed by any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and
equipped professional. After
changing the engine oil, the
oil change system should be
reset. (→P. 385)
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 453 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
454
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
For some models, malfunction indicator lamp will come on if the fuel tank
becomes completely empty. If the fuel tank is empty, refuel the vehicle imme-
diately. The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after several trips.
If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off, contact any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional
as soon as possible.
■ Key reminder buzzer
The buzzer indicates that the key has not been removed with the engine off
and the driver’s door opened.
■ If the DPF system warning light comes on (if equipped)
The deposit collected in the filter needs to be regenerated.
To regenerate the filter, the following driving methods are recommended
*:
● By driving continuously (for example, at around 60 km/h [37 mph] for
approximately 20 minutes).
● By avoiding short trips, or by driving continuously (leaving the engine run-
ning for long periods of time).
The DPF system warning light will extinguish when regeneration is complete.
However, if this driving cannot be carried out, or if the light does not extin-
guish even after driving, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional imme-
diately.
For details of the DPF system. (→P. 238)
*: When driving, pay sufficient attention to weather, road conditions, terrain
and traffic conditions, and drive according to traffic laws.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 454 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
455
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
7
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on (vehi-
cles with VSC system)
Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional. The vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the
ABS system may fail, which could cause an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
NOTICE
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on when the boost pressure in
the turbocharger is abnormally high (diesel engine)
Never drive at high speed or race the engine even after the lamp goes off.
■ If the fuel system warning light flashes (diesel engine)
Never drive the vehicle with the warning light flashing. Continued driving
with water accumulated in the fuel filter will damage the fuel injection pump.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 455 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
456
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
If you have a flat tire
● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or R (manual
transmission).
● Stop the engine.
● Turn on the emergency flashers. (→P. 438)
Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be
replaced with the spare tire.
For details about tires: →P. 3 9 7
CAUTION
■ If you have a flat tire
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair, which could result in an accident.
Before jacking up the vehicle
Location of the spare tire
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 456 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
457
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
7
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Single-cab models
The jack and tools are stored
behind the seat.
X Extra-cab models
The jack and tools are stored
under the lid.
X Double-cab models
The jack and tools are stored
under the bottom cushion.
Location of the jack and tools
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 457 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
458
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
The padlock for locking the spare tire is located at the following posi-
tion.
Location of the padlock (if equipped)
X Type A X Type B
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 458 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
459
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
7
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may cause the vehicle to suddenly fall off the
jack, leading to death or serious injury.
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or install-
ing and removing tire chains.
● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replac-
ing tires on this vehicle.
● Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the correct jack up point.
● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported by
the jack.
● Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is inside.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace
the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one work-
ing on or near the vehicle may be injured.
■ Using the jack handle
Tighten all the jack handle bolts securely using a Phillips-head screwdriver
or your hand, to prevent the extension parts from coming apart unexpect-
edly.
● Do not continue jacking up once the yel-
low caution line has appeared.
Yellow
caution line
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 459 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
460
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Single-cab models
Unhook the strap and take out
the tool bag.
Take out the jack.
For loosening
For tightening
Taking out the jack and tool bag
1
2
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 460 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
461
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
7
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Extra-cab models
Vehicles with rear seat cushions:
Remove the rear seat cushions.
(→P. 139)
Pull the tag and open the lid.
Unhook the strap and take out
the tool bag.
Take out the jack.
For loosening
For tightening
1
2
3
4
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 461 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
462
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Double-cab models
Tumbling the bottom cushion (→P. 139)
Open the lid.
Take out the tool bag.
Take out the jack.
For loosening
For tightening
1
2
3
4
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 462 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
463
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
7
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
For vehicles with the padlock at type A position (→P. 458), remove
the padlock.
Assembling the jack handle.
Remove the jack handle end, jack handle extensions and wheel nut
wrench from the tool bag and assemble by following these steps.
Loosen the bolts using a
screwdriver.
Assemble the jack handle
end, jack handle extensions
and wheel nut wrench and
tighten the bolts.
Check that the bolts are firmly
tightened.
Insert the jack handle extension
into the lowering screw.
Lower
Raise
Place a rag under the jack han-
dle extension to protect the
bumper.
Taking out the spare tire
1
2
1
2
3
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 463 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
464
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Lower the spare tire completely
to the ground.
For vehicles with the padlock at type B position (→P. 458), remove
the padlock.
Remove the holding bracket
and pull out the spare tire.
If it is difficult to pull the tire away
from the vehicle, hold the tire and
move it away from the flat tire, as
shown in the illustration.
4
5
6
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 464 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
465
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
7
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Chock the tires.
Replacing a flat tire
1
Flat tire Wheel chock positions
Front
Left-hand side Behind the rear right-hand side tire
Right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire
Rear
Left-hand side In front of the front right-hand side tire
Right-hand side In front of the front left-hand side tire
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 465 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
466
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Remove the wheel ornament.
X Type A
Pry off the wheel ornament, using
the beveled end of the wheel nut
wrench as shown.
To protect the wheel ornament,
place a rag between the wheel nut
wrench and the wheel ornament.
X Type B
Pry off the wheel ornament, using
the beveled end of the wheel nut
wrench as shown.
To protect the wheel ornament,
place a rag between the wheel nut
wrench and the wheel ornament.
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 466 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
467
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
7
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts
(one turn).
Assembling the jack handle. (→P. 463)
Position the jack at the jack
points as shown.
Front
Under the cross member
Rear
Under the rear axle housing
3
4
5
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 467 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
468
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
When positioning the jack under
the rear axle housing, make sure
the groove on the top of the jack
fits with the rear axle housing.
If the tire is still underneath the
vehicle, leave the vehicle jacked
up and use a tool to pull the tire
out.
Remove all the wheel nuts and
the tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
6
7
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 468 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
469
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
7
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ Replacing a flat tire
● Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury:
• Lower the spare tire completely to the ground before removing it from
under the vehicle.
• Do not try to remove the wheel ornament by hand. Take due care in
handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.
• Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately
after the vehicle has been driven.
After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around
the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet
or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.
● Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen
and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 105 N•m
(10.7 kgf•m, 77 ft•lbf) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
• Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the
wheel while the vehicle is moving.
• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically
designed for that wheel.
• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or
bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional.
• When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the tapered
ends facing inward. (→P. 403)
■ When take out the spare tire
● Be careful not to touch the exhaust, as you may burn yourself.
● Be careful not to injure yourself by trapping your hands in or becoming
caught in the rear under protection.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 469 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
470
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Remove any dirt or foreign mat-
ter from the wheel contact sur-
face.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is in
motion, causing the tire to come
off.
Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by
approximately the same amount.
When replacing a steel wheel
with a steel wheel, tighten the
wheel nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose con-
tact with the disc wheel seat.
Installing the spare tire
1
2
Disc wheel
seat
Tapered portion
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 470 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
471
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
7
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
When replacing an aluminum
wheel with a steel wheel,
tighten the wheel nuts until the
tapered portion comes into
loose contact with the disc
wheel seat.
When replacing an aluminum
wheel with an aluminum wheel,
turn the wheel nuts until the
washers come into contact with
the disc wheel.
Lower the vehicle.
Tapered portion
Disc wheel
seat
Disc wheel
Washer
Wheel nut
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 471 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
472
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Firmly tighten each wheel nut
two or three times in the order
shown in the illustration.
Tightening torque:
105 N•m (10.7 kgf•m, 77 ft•lbf)
Vehicles with spare tire of the
same wheel type as the
installed tires: Reinstall the
wheel ornament.
4
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 472 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
473
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
7
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Lay down the tire with the outer
side facing up, and hook the
holding bracket as shown in the
illustration.
On vehicles with the padlock at
type B position (→P. 458), reattach
the padlock after securing the hold-
ing bracket.
Raise the tire.
After the tire goes half way up,
check that the suspended chain is
able to enter the tire hole, for
proper storage.
Check the tire from the side to see
that the tire is stored horizontally.
On vehicles with the padlock at
type A position (→P. 458), reattach
the padlock after securing the tire.
Make sure the padlock is at an
appropriate position as shown in
the illustration.
Less than 100 mm (3.9 in.)
Stow the tools and jack securely.
Stowing the flat tire, jack and all tools
1
2
Disk wheel
Top of
padlock
1
3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 473 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
474
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Certification for the jack
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 474 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
475
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
7
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ After using the tools and jack
Before driving, make sure all the tools and jack are securely in place in their
storage location to reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision
or sudden braking.
NOTICE
■ When stowing the flat tire
Ensure that there is no object caught between the tire and the vehicle
underbody.
■ When assembling the jack handle extension
Tighten all the joints securely. Otherwise the extension may come off and it
may damage the paint or vehicle body.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 475 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
476
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
If the engine will not start
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Gasoline engine: Refuel the vehicle.
Diesel engine: →P. 4 8 5
● The engine may be flooded. (gasoline engine)
Try to restart the engine again following correct starting procedures.
(→P. 183)
● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(→P. 8 5 )
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 478)
● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem:
● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 478)
Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair
procedures are unknown.
If the engine will not start even though correct starting proce-
dures are being followed (
→P. 183), consider each of the follow-
ing points:
The engine will not start even though the starter motor operates
normally.
The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and head-
lights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low
volume.
The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and head-
lights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 476 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
477
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
∗
Set the parking brake.
Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” position.
Depress the brake pedal.
Press the shift lock override
button.
The shift lever can be shifted while
the button is pressed.
∗: If equipped
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake
pedal, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a sys-
tem to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the
vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to
ensure that the shift lever can be shifted:
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 477 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
478
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
If the vehicle battery is discharged
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle
with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle by following the
steps below.
Open the hood. (→P. 378)
Connect the jumper cables according to the following procedure:
Connect a positive jumper cable clamp to the positive (+) battery
terminal on your vehicle.
Connect the clamp on the other end of the positive cable to the
positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.
Connect a negative cable clamp to the negative (-) battery termi-
nal on the second vehicle.
Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative cable to a
solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point away from the battery
and any moving parts, as shown in the illustration.
X 2TR-FE engine
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the
vehicle’s battery is discharged.
You can also call any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional or a qualified
repair shop.
1
2
1
2
3
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 478 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
479
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
7
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X 1KD-FTV engine
X 2KD-FTV engine
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 479 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
480
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed
slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to
recharge the battery of your vehicle.
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and start the
engine of your vehicle.
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in
the exact reverse order from which they were connected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle inspected at any authorized
Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-
fessional as soon as possible.
■ Starting the engine when the battery is discharged (vehicles with auto-
matic transmission)
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■ To prevent battery discharge
● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running
at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic.
■ When the battery is removed or discharged (vehicles with power win-
dows only)
The power windows must be initialized. (→P. 150)
■ Charging the battery
The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the
vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of cer-
tain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may
discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges
automatically during driving.)
3
4
5
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 480 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
481
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
7
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flam-
mable gas that may be emitted from the battery:
● Make sure each jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that
it is not unintentionally in contact with any other than the intended terminal.
● Do not allow the + and - clamps of the jumper cables to come into contact
with each other.
● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near
the battery.
■ Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while
related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following pre-
cautions when handling the battery:
● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care
not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing
or the vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the battery.
● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention
can be received.
● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and
other battery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the battery.
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle (vehicles with manual transmission)
Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle as the three-way catalytic converter or
catalytic converter may overheat and become a fire hazard.
NOTICE
■ When handling jumper cables
When connecting the jumper cables, ensure that they do not become entan-
gled in the cooling fan or belt.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 481 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
482
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
If your vehicle overheats
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning sys-
tem, and then stop the engine.
If you see steam:
Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.
If you do not see steam:
Carefully lift the hood.
After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the hoses and
radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.
Radiator
Cooling fan
If a large amount of coolant
leaks, immediately contact any
authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly quali-
fied and equipped professional.
The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.
● The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge (→P. 100)
enters the red zone or a loss of engine power is experienced.
(For example, the vehicle speed does not increase.)
● Steam comes out from under the hood.
Correction procedures
1
2
3
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 482 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
483
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
7
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the upper and lower
lines on the reservoir.
Reservoir
Upper line
Lower line
Radiator cap (if equipped)
Add engine coolant if necessary. (→P. 508)
Water can be used in an emergency if engine coolant is unavailable.
4
1
2
3
4
X Gasoline engine X Diesel engine
5
X Gasoline engine X Diesel engine
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 483 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
484
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Start the engine to check that the radiator cooling fan operates and
to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses.
If the fan is not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and contact any authorized Toyota
dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-
sional.
If the fan is operating:
Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest authorized Toyota dealer
or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
CAUTION
■ When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.
● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until
the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.
● Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from
the fans and belts. Failure to do so may cause the hands or clothing to be
caught, resulting in serious injury.
● Do not loosen the radiator cap or the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine and radiator are hot. High temperature steam or coolant could
spray out.
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Add coolant slowly after the engine has cooled down sufficiently. Adding
cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.
■ To prevent damage to the cooling system
Observe the following precautions:
● Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust
etc.).
● Do not use any coolant additive.
6
7
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 484 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
485
7
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
If you run out of fuel and the engine stalls
(diesel engine only)
If you run out of fuel and the engine stalls:
Refuel your vehicle.
To bleed the fuel system, oper-
ate the priming pump until you
feel more resistance.
Start the engine. (→P. 183)
If the engine does not start after the above steps have been performed,
wait for 10 seconds and try steps and again. If the engine still does
not start, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional.
After starting the engine, depress the accelerator pedal lightly until the
engine runs smoothly.
1
2
NOTICE
■ When restarting the engine
● Do not crank the engine before refueling and operating the priming pump.
This may damage the engine and fuel system.
● Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may
overheat the starter and wiring system.
3
2 3
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 485 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
486
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
If the vehicle becomes stuck
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P
(automatic transmission) or N (manual transmission).
Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the stuck tire.
Place wood, stones or some other material under the tires to help
provide traction.
Restart the engine.
Vehicles with rear differential lock system: Lock the rear differential.
(→P. 230)
Shift the shift lever to the D or R position (automatic transmission)
or 1 or R position (manual transmission) and carefully apply the
accelerator to free the vehicle.
For vehicles with VSC system, turn off TRC and VSC if these functions are
hampering your attempts to free the vehicle. (→P. 234)
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt or snow:
1
2
3
4
5
6
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 486 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
487
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
7
When trouble arises
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
CAUTION
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the
surrounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people.
The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes
free. Use extreme caution.
■ When shifting the shift lever
For vehicles with automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the shift
lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may
cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damage to the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more
than necessary.
● If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed,
the vehicle may require towing to be freed.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 487 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
488
7-2. Steps to take in an emergency
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 488 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
489
8
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
8-1. Specifications
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.)...........490
Fuel information .................517
8-2. Initialization
Items to initialize ................520
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 489 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
490
8-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
*
1
: Unladen vehicle
*
2
: Without rear bumper
*
3
: With rear bumper
*
4
: Without over fender
*
5
: With over fender
*
6
: With 205R16C tires
*
7
: With 265/65R17 tires
*
8
: With 225/70R17C tires
*
9
: With 255/70R15C tires
Dimensions
Overall length
5135 mm (202.2 in.)
*
2
5260 mm (207.1 in.)*
3
Overall width
1760 mm (69.3 in.)
*
4
1835 mm (72.2 in.)*
5
Overall height*
1
Single-cab models
1795 mm (70.7 in.)
*
6
1805 mm (71.1 in.)*
7, 8
Extra-cab models
1835 mm (72.2 in.)
*
6, 9
1845 mm (72.6 in.)*
7, 8
Double-cab models
1850 mm (72.8 in.)
*
6, 9
1860 mm (73.2 in.)*
7, 8
Wheelbase 3085 mm (121.5 in.)
Front and rear tread
1510 mm (59.4 in.)
*
6
1540 mm (60.6 in.)*
7, 9
1500 mm (59.1 in.)*
8
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 490 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
491
8
8-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Single-cab models
X Extra-cab models
*
1
: Models for European countries*
3
*
2
: Models only for Finland*
3
*
3
: See “Checking your vehicle’s model” if you are not sure of which model
your vehicle is. (→P. 12)
Weights (except for Kazakhstan)
Gross
vehicle mass
4WD
models
Left-hand drive
vehicles
2640 kg (5820 lb.)
Right-hand
drive vehicles
2730 kg (6019 lb.)
Pre Runner 2640 kg (5820 lb.)
Maximum
permissible
axle capacity
Front 1280 kg (2822 lb.)
Rear 1600 kg (3527 lb.)
Drawbar load 115 kg (254 lb.)
Towi ng
capacity
Without brake 750 kg (1653 lb.)
With brake 2800 kg (6173 lb.)
Gross
vehicle mass
4WD
models
Left-hand drive
vehicles
2620 kg (5776 lb.)*
1
2705 kg (5964 lb.)*
2
Right-hand
drive vehicles
3010 kg (6636 lb.)
Pre Runner 2590 kg (5710 lb.)
Maximum
permissible
axle capacity
Front 1280 kg (2822 lb.)
Rear
Left-hand drive
vehicles
1600 kg (3527 lb.)
Right-hand
drive vehicles
1900 kg (4189 lb.)
Drawbar load 115 kg (254 lb.)
Towi ng
capacity
Without brake 750 kg (1653 lb.)
With brake 2800 kg (6173 lb.)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 491 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
492
8-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Double-cab models
Gross
vehicle
mass
4WD
models
1KD-FTV
engine
Left-hand
drive
vehicles
2730 kg (6019 lb.)
Right-hand
drive
vehicles
3080 kg (6790 lb.)
2KD-FTV
engine
Left-hand
drive
vehicles
2705 kg (5964 lb.)
*
1
2690 kg (5930 lb.)*
2
Right-hand
drive
vehicles
3040 kg (6702 lb.)
Pre Runner 2600 kg (5732 lb.)
Maximum
permissible
axle
capacity
1KD-FTV
engine
Left-hand
drive
vehicles
Front 1340 kg (2954 lb.)
Rear 1600 kg (3527 lb.)
Right-hand
drive
vehicles
Front 1340 kg (2954 lb.)
Rear 1900 kg (4189 lb.)
2KD-FTV
engine
Left-hand
drive
vehicles
Front 1280 kg (2822 lb.)
Rear 1600 kg (3527 lb.)
Right-hand
drive
vehicles
Front 1280 kg (2822 lb.)
Rear 1900 kg (4189 lb.)
Drawbar load
80 kg (176 lb.)
*
1
115 kg (254 lb.)*
2
Towi ng
capacity
Without brake 750 kg (1653 lb.)
With brake
1500 kg (3307 lb.)
*
1
2790 kg (6151 lb.)*
3
2800 kg (6173 lb.)*
4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 492 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
493
8
8-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
*
1
: For KUN25L-PRMDH model*
5
*
2
: Except for KUN25L-PRMDH model*
5
*
3
: For KUN26L-PRMDYW and KUN26L-PRADYW models*
5
*
4
: Except for KUN25L-PRMDH, KUN26L-PRMDYW and
KUN26L-PRADYW models
*
5
*
5
: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label or plate.
(→P. 494)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 493 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
494
8-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■
Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for
your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your
Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the
rear right frame.
Models made in South Africa
*:
This number is also on the
manufacturer’s label.
Vehicle identification
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 494 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
495
8
8-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Models made in Thailand*:
This number is also on the
manufacturer’s plate.
*: See “Checking your vehicle’s model” if you are not sure of which model
your vehicle is. (→P. 12)
■
Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
X Gasoline engine X Diesel engine
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 495 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
496
8-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X 2TR-FE engine
X 1KD-FTV engine
X 2KD-FTV engine
Engine
Model 2TR-FE
Type 4 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 95.0 × 95.0 mm (3.74 × 3.74 in.)
Displacement 2694 cm
3
(164.4 cu.in.)
Valve clearance
(engine cold)
Automatic adjustment
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Model 1KD-FTV
Type
4 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, diesel
(with turbocharger)
Bore and stroke 96.0 × 103.0 mm (3.78 × 4.06 in.)
Displacement 2982 cm
3
(182.0 cu.in.)
Valve clearance
(engine cold)
Intake: 0.20 0.30 mm (0.008 0.012 in.)
Exhaust: 0.35 0.45 mm (0.014 0.018 in.)
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Model 2KD-FTV
Type
4 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, diesel
(with turbocharger)
Bore and stroke 92.0 × 93.8 mm (3.62 × 3.69 in.)
Displacement 2494 cm
3
(152.2 cu.in.)
Valve clearance
(engine cold)
Intake: 0.20 0.30 mm (0.008 0.012 in.)
Exhaust: 0.35 0.45 mm (0.014 0.018 in.)
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 496 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
497
8
8-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Gasoline engine
X Diesel engine
*: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label or plate.
(→P. 494)
Fuel
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Research Octane
Number
91 or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
76 L (20.1 gal., 16.7 Imp.gal.)
Fuel type
X EU area
Diesel fuel conforming to European standard
EN590
X Except EU area (except Russia and KUN25L-
PRMDH models
*)
Diesel fuel that contains 50 ppm or less of sulfur
X Except EU area (Russia)
Diesel fuel confirming to GOST R52368-2005
(Sulfur max 50 ppm).
X Except EU area (KUN25L-PRMDH model* for
Kazakhstan)
Diesel fuel that contains 500 ppm or less of sulfur
X Except EU area (KUN25L-PRMDH model*
except for Kazakhstan)
Diesel fuel only
Cetane number 48 or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
X Except for KUN25L-PRMDH model*
80 L (21.1 gal., 17.6 Imp.gal.)
X For KUN25L-PRMDH model*
76 L (20.1 gal., 16.7 Imp.gal.)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 497 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
498
8-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Gasoline engine
*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing
the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes,
and check the oil level on the dipstick.
■
Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use
Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy
the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade:
0W-20, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30:
API grade SL “Energy-Conserving”, SM “Energy-Conserving” or SN
“Resource-Conserving”; or ILSAC multigrade engine oil
15W-40 and 20W-50:
API grade SL, SM or SN multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity (SAE):
If you use SAE 10W-30 or a
higher viscosity engine oil in
extremely low temperatures,
the engine may become difficult
to start, so SAE 0W-20, 5W-20
or 5W-30 engine oil is recom-
mended.
Lubrication system
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill Reference
*)
With filter
Without filter
5.6 L (5.9 qt., 4.9 Imp.qt.)
5.3 L (5.6 qt., 4.7 Imp.qt.)
Temperature range anticipated
before next oil change
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 498 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
499
8
8-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which
allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil
when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity
(one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is
operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container labels:
Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil contain-
ers to help you select the oil you should use.
API Service Symbol
Top portion: “API SERVICE SN”
means the oil quality designa-
tion by American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Center portion: “SAE 0W-20”
means the SAE viscosity grade.
Lower portion: “Resource-con-
serving” means that the oil has
fuel-saving and environmental
protection capabilities.
ILSAC Certification Mark
The International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC)
Certification Mark is displayed on the front of the container.
1
2
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 499 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
500
8-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Diesel engine (except for Russia, Ukraine and KUN25L-PRMDH
models
*
1
)
*
1
: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label or plate.
(→P. 494)
*
2
: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing
the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes,
and check the oil level on the dipstick.
■
Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Toyota
recommends the use of approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”.
Another motor oil of matching quality can also be used.
Oil grade: ACEA C2
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill
reference
*
2
)
With filter
Without filter
6.9 L (7.3 qt., 6.1 Imp.qt.)
6.6 L (7.0 qt., 5.8 Imp.qt.)
NOTICE
Using engine oil other than ACEA C2 may damage the catalytic converter.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 500 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
501
8
8-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Recommended viscosity (SAE):
SAE 0W-30 is filled into your
Toyota vehicle at manufactur-
ing, and the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
Oil viscosity (0W-30 is explained here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-30 indicates the characteristic of the oil which
allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
• The 30 in 0W-30 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil
when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity
(one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is
operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
Temperature range anticipated
before next oil change
Preferred
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 501 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
502
8-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Diesel engine (for Russia and Ukraine)
*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing
the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes,
and check the oil level on the dipstick.
■
Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Toyota
recommends the use of approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”.
Another motor oil of matching quality can also be used.
Oil grade: ACEA B1, API CF-4 or CF
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill
reference
*)
With filter
Without filter
6.9 L (7.3 qt., 6.1 Imp.qt.)
6.6 L (7.0 qt., 5.8 Imp.qt.)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 502 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
503
8
8-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Recommended viscosity (SAE):
SAE 5W-30 is filled into your
Toyota vehicle at manufactur-
ing, and the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
If you use SAE 10W-30 or a
higher viscosity engine oil in
extremely low temperatures,
the engine may become difficult
to start, so SAE 5W-30 engine
oil is recommended.
Oil viscosity (5W-30 is explained here as an example):
• The 5W in 5W-30 indicates the characteristic of the oil which
allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
• The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil
when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity
(one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is
operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
Temperature range anticipated
before next oil change
Preferred
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 503 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
504
8-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Diesel engine (for KUN25L-PRMDH model*
1
for Kazakhstan)
*
1
: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label or plate.
(→P. 494)
*
2
: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing
the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes,
and check the oil level on the dipstick.
■
Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use
Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to sat-
isfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: API CF-4, CF or ACEA B1
(You may also use API CE or CD.)
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill —
reference
*
2
)
With filter
Without filter
6.9 L (7.3 qt., 6.1 Imp.qt.)
6.6 L (7.0 qt., 5.8 Imp.qt.)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 504 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
505
8
8-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Recommended viscosity (SAE):
SAE 5W-30 is the best choice
for good fuel economy and
good starting in cold weather.
If you use SAE 10W-30 or a
higher viscosity engine oil in
extremely low temperatures,
the engine may become difficult
to start, so SAE 5W-30 engine
oil is recommended.
Oil viscosity (5W-30 is explained here as an example):
• The 5W in 5W-30 indicates the characteristic of the oil which
allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
• The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil
when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity
(one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is
operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
Temperature range anticipated
before next oil change
Preferred
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 505 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
506
8-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X Diesel engine (for KUN25L-PRMDH models*
1
except for
Kazakhstan)
*
1
: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label or plate.
(→P. 494)
*
2
: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing
the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes,
and check the oil level on the dipstick.
■
Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use
Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy
the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: API CF-4, CF or ACEA B1
(You may also use API CE or CD.)
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill
reference
*
2
)
With filter
Without filter
6.9 L (7.3 qt., 6.1 Imp.qt.)
6.6 L (7.0 qt., 5.8 Imp.qt.)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 506 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
507
8
8-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Recommended viscosity (SAE):
If you use SAE 10W-30 or a
higher viscosity engine oil in
extremely low temperatures,
the engine may become difficult
to start, so SAE 5W-30 engine
oil is recommended.
Oil viscosity (10W-30 is explained here as an example):
• The 10W in 10W-30 indicates the characteristic of the oil which
allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow
for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.
• The 30 in 10W-30 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil
when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity
(one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is
operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
Temperature range anticipated
before next oil change
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 507 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
508
8-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Cooling system
Capacity
Gasoline
engine
X With heater
7.8 L (8.2 qt., 6.9 Imp.qt.)
X Without heater
7.0 L (7.4 qt., 6.2 Imp.qt.)
Diesel
engine
X With manual transmission
9.8 L (10.4 qt., 8.6 Imp.qt.)
X With automatic transmission
11.1 L (11.7 qt., 9.8 Imp.qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following:
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-
nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-
life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
Ignition system
Spark plug
Make DENSO SK20HR-A11
Gap 1.1 mm (0.043 in.)
NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 508 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
509
8
8-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
*: The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference.
If replacement is necessary, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or
repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
Electrical system
Battery
Specific gravity reading
at 20°C (68°F):
1.250 1.290 Fully charged
1.160 1.200 Half charged
1.060 1.100 Discharged
Charging rates
Quick charge
Slow charge
15 A max.
5 A max.
Automatic transmission
Fluid capacity* 10.6 L (11.2 qt., 9.3 Imp.qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
■ Automatic transmission fluid type
Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause
deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied
by vibration, and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 509 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
510
8-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Manual transmission
Oil capacity
4WD models 2.2 L (2.3 qt., 1.9 Imp.qt.)
Pre Runner 2.6 L (2.7 qt., 2.3 Imp.qt.)
Oil type Gear oil API GL-3 (GL-4)
Recommended oil viscosity
X For Martinique, Israel, Guadeloupe and
French Guiana
SAE 75W-90 (80W, 80W-90)
X Others
SAE 75W-90
Transfer
Oil capacity 1.0 L (1.1 qt., 0.9 Imp.qt.)
Oil type Gear oil API GL-4 or GL-5
Recommended oil viscosity SAE 75W-90
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 510 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
511
8
8-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
*
1
: Made in South Africa*
3
*
2
: Made in Thailand*
3
*
3
: See “Checking your vehicle’s model” if you are not sure of which model
your vehicle is. (→P. 12)
Differential
Oil
capacity
Front
Without A.D.D 1.45 L (1.53 qt., 1.28 Imp.qt.)
With A.D.D 1.65 L (1.74 qt., 1.45 Imp.qt.)
Rear
With rear differential
lock system
2.90 L (3.06 qt., 2.55 Imp.qt.)
With LSD 3.35 L (3.54 qt., 2.95 Imp.qt.)
Normal
2.45 L (2.59 qt., 2.16 Imp.qt.)*
1
3.35 L (3.54 qt., 2.95 Imp.qt.)*
2
Oil type
Without LSD Hypoid gear oil API GL-5
With LSD Hypoid gear oil LSD API GL-5
Oil viscosity
Without A.D.D.
Above -18°C (0°F):
SAE90
Below -18°C (0°F):
SAE 80W or SAE 80W-90
With A.D.D. SAE 75W-90
Clutch
Pedal free play 5 15 mm (0.2 0.6 in.)
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or
SAE J1704 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 4
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 511 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
512
8-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
*
1
: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 490 N (50 kgf,
110 lbf) while the engine is running
*
2
: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 200 N (20.4 kgf,
45.0 lbf)
*: For TGN26L-PRMDK and KUN25L-PRMDH models (The model code is
indicated on the manufacturer’s label or plate. [→P. 494])
Brakes
Pedal
clearance
*
1
Left-hand
drive vehicles
Without
VSC
96 mm (3.8 in.)
With VSC 90 mm (3.5 in.)
Right-hand drive vehicles 83 mm (3.3 in.)
Pedal free play
1.0 6.0 mm
(0.04 0.24 in.)
Parking brake lever travel*
2
7 9 clicks
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS
No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1704
or FMVSS No.116 DOT 4
Chassis lubrication
Propeller
shafts
Spider Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2
Slide yoke*
Molybdenum-disulfide lithium base chas-
sis grease, NLGI No.2 or lithium base
chassis grease, NLGI No.2
Steering
Free play Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)
Power steering fluid type
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON
®
II or III
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 512 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
513
8
8-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X 15 inch tires
X 16 inch tires
Tires and wheels
Tire size 255/70R15C 112/110S
Tire inflation
pressure
(Recommended
cold tire inflation
pressure)
Front wheel
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or
bar, psi)
Rear wheel
(unloaded)
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or
bar, psi)
Rear wheel
(loaded)
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or
bar, psi)
200 (2.0, 29) 200 (2.0, 29) 250 (2.5, 36)
Wheel size 15 × 7JJ, 15 × 7J
Wheel nut torque 105 N•m (10.7 kgf•m, 77 ft•lbf)
Tire size 205R16C 8PR 110/108S
Tire inflation
pressure
(Recommended
cold tire inflation
pressure)
Front wheel
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or
bar, psi)
Rear wheel
(unloaded)
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or
bar, psi)
Rear wheel
(loaded)
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or
bar, psi)
240 (2.4, 35) 240 (2.4, 35) 320 (3.2, 46)
Wheel size 16 × 6J
Wheel nut torque 105 N•m (10.7 kgf•m, 77 ft•lbf)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 513 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
514
8-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
X 17 inch tires (type A)
X 17 inch tires (type B)
Tire size 265/65R17 112S
Tire inflation
pressure
(Recommended
cold tire inflation
pressure)
X DLX grade models with 1KD-FTV engine
230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 33 psi)
X SR grade models with 2KD-FTV engine
Single-cab models
230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 33 psi)
Double-cab and extra-cab models
200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 29 psi)
X Other models
200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 29 psi)
Wheel size 17 × 7 1/2J
Wheel nut torque 105 N•m (10.7 kgf•m, 77 ft•lbf)
Tire size 225/70R17C 108/106S
Tire inflation
pressure
(Recommended
cold tire inflation
pressure)
Front wheel kPa
(kgf/cm
2
or bar,
psi)
Rear wheel
(unloaded)
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or
bar, psi)
Rear wheel
(loaded)
kPa (kgf/cm
2
or
bar, psi)
Single-cab
models
240 (2.4, 35) 240 (2.4, 35) 300 (3.0, 44)
Extra-cab and
double-cab
models
240 (2.4, 35) 240 (2.4, 35)
300 (3.0, 44)*
1
300 (3.0, 44)*
2, 3
320 (3.2, 46)*
2, 4
Wheel size 17 × 6J
Wheel nut torque 105 N•m (10.7 kgf•m, 77 ft•lbf)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 514 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
515
8
8-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
*
1
: Left-hand drive vehicles
*
2
: Right-hand drive vehicles
*
3
: Half loaded
*
4
: Full loaded
■ When towing a trailer
Add 20.0 kPa (0.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar, 3 psi) to the recommended tire inflation
pressure and drive at speeds below 100 km/h (62 mph).
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 515 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
516
8-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
A: H4 halogen bulbs
B: H16 halogen bulbs
C: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
D: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
E: Single end bulbs (amber)
F: Single end bulbs (clear)
G: Double end bulbs
*: If equipped
Light bulbs
Light bulbs W Type
Exterior
Headlights 60/55 A
Front fog lights
* 19 B
Front position lights 5 C
Front turn signal lights 21 D
Side turn signal lights
Fender-mounted type
Mirror-mounted type
5
5
C
D
Rear turn signal lights 21 E
Back-up lights 21 F
Rear fog light
* 21 F
License plate lights 5 C
Stop/tail lights 21/5 F
Interior
Interior light 8 G
Personal lights
* 8C
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 516 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
517
8
8-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Fuel information
◆ Gasoline engine
Your vehicle must only use unleaded gasoline.
For optimum engine performance, select unleaded gasoline with a
Research Octane Number of 91 or higher.
◆ Diesel engine
X EU area:
Your vehicle must use only diesel fuel conforming to European
standard EN590.
X Except EU area (except Russia and KUN25L-PRMDH models*):
Your vehicle must use only diesel fuel that contains 50 ppm or less
of sulfur and has a cetane number of 48 or higher.
X Except EU area (Russia):
You must only use diesel fuel with a cetane number of 48 or higher.
Your vehicle must use only diesel fuel conforming to GOST
R52368-2005 (Sulfur max 50 ppm).
X Except EU area (KUN25L-PRMDH model* for Kazakhstan):
Your vehicle must use only diesel fuel that contains 500 ppm or less
of sulfur and has a cetane number of 48 or higher.
X Except EU area (KUN25L-PRMDH model* except for
Kazakhstan):
You must only use diesel fuel with a cetane number of 48 or higher.
*: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label or plate. (→P. 494)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 517 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
518
8-1. Specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline (gasoline engine)
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your vehicle has a fuel tank opening that
only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■ If you plan to drive in foreign countries (diesel engine)
Low sulfur diesel fuel may not be available, so please check the availability
with your distributor.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional.
● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerat-
ing or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
NOTICE
■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used, the engine will be
damaged.
● Gasoline engine: Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline will cause the three-way catalytic converter to lose its
effectiveness and the emission control system to function improperly.
● Gasoline engine: Bioethanol fuel sold under names such as “E50” or “E85”
and fuel containing a large amount of ethanol should not be used. Your
vehicle can use gasoline mixed with 10 % max ethanol. The use of fuel
with more than 10 % ethanol content (E10) will damage the vehicle’s fuel
system. You must ensure that refueling is carried out only from a source
where fuel specification and quality can be guaranteed. In case of any
doubt, ask any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-
fied and equipped professional.
● Diesel engine (EU area): FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) fuel sold under
names such as “B30” or “B100” and fuel containing a large amount of
FAME should not be used. The use of these fuels will damage the vehi-
cle’s fuel system. In case of any doubt, ask any authorized Toyota dealer
or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 518 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
519
8
8-1. Specifications
Vehicle specifications
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
NOTICE
● Diesel engine (except EU area [except Russia]): FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl
Ester) fuel sold under names such as “B30” or “B100” and fuel containing
a large amount of FAME should not be used. Your vehicle can use diesel
mixed with 5% max biodiesel FAME (B5). The use of fuel with more than
5% FAME content (B5) will damage the vehicle’s fuel system. You must
ensure that refueling is carried out only from a source where fuel specifica-
tion and quality can be guaranteed.
In case of any doubt, ask any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or
another duly qualified and equipped professional.
● Diesel engine (except EU area [Russia]): FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester)
fuel sold under name such as “B30” or “B100” and fuel containing a large
amount of FAME should not be used.
The use of these fuel will damage the vehicle’s fuel system. In case of any
doubt, ask any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-
fied and equipped professional.
■ Notice on diesel fuel quality
● Except KUN25L-PRMDH model
*: Do not use a fuel that contains more
than 50 ppm of sulfur.
Use of such a high sulfur fuel may damage the engine.
● KUN25L-PRMDH model
* for Kazakhstan: Do not use a fuel that contains
more than 500 ppm of sulfur. Use of such a high sulfur fuel may damage
the engine.
*: The model code is indicated on the manufacturer’s label or plate.
(→P. 494)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 519 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
520
8-2. Initialization
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Items to initialize
The following items must be initialized for normal system opera-
tion after such cases as the battery is reconnected, or mainte-
nance is performed on the vehicle.
Item When to initialize Reference
Power windows
(if equipped)
After reconnecting or chang-
ing the battery
P. 150
Engine oil
maintenance data
(if equipped)
After changing engine oil P. 385
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 520 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
521
Index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
What to do if...
(Troubleshooting) .....................522
Alphabetical index ......................526
For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the
“Navigation system Owner’s manual” for information
regarding the navigation system.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 521 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
522
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
● If you lose your keys, new genuine keys can be made by
any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly
qualified and equipped professional. (→P. 11 4 )
● Is the key battery weak or depleted? (→P. 406)
● The function may not operate properly due to the condition
of the radio wave. (→P. 11 9)
● Is the rear door child-protector lock set?
The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle
when the lock is set. Open the rear door from outside and
then unlock the rear door child-protector lock. (→P. 131)
If you have a problem, check the following before contacting any
authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified
and equipped professional.
The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed
You lose your keys
The doors cannot be locked or unlocked
(vehicles with wireless remote control)
The rear door cannot be opened
(vehicles with rear door child-protector lock)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 522 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
523
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
● Vehicles with manual transmission
Do you turn the key with the clutch pedal depressed firmly?
(→P. 183)
● Vehicles with automatic transmission
Is the shift lever in P? (→P. 183)
● Is the steering wheel unlocked? (→P. 185)
● Is the battery discharged? (→P. 478)
● Is the engine switch in the “ON” position?
If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake
pedal with the engine switch in the “ON” position: →P. 4 7 7
● It is locked to prevent theft of the vehicle if the key is
removed from the engine switch. (→P. 185)
If you think something is wrong
The engine does not start
The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you
depress the brake pedal (vehicles with automatic trans-
mission)
The steering wheel cannot be turned after the engine is
stopped
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 523 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
524
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
● Is the window lock switch pressed?
The power window except for the one at the driver’s seat
cannot be operated if the window lock switch is pressed.
(→P. 150)
● The seat belt reminder light is flashing (vehicles with driver’s
seat belt buzzer)
Is the driver wearing the seat belt? (→P. 452)
● The brake system warning light is on
Is the parking brake released? (→P. 195)
Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may
also sound. (→P. 448)
● Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the
alarm?
The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. (→P. 8 9)
To stop the alarm, turn the engine switch to the “ON” position
or start the engine.
The windows do not open or close by operating the power
window switches (if equipped)
A warning buzzer sounds during driving
An alarm is activated and the horn sounds (if equipped)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 524 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
525
What to do if... (Troubleshooting)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
● When a warning light turns on, refer to P. 448.
● Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with
the spare tire. (→P. 456)
● Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in
mud, dirt, or snow. (→P. 486)
A warning light turns on
When a problem has occurred
If you have a flat tire
The vehicle becomes stuck
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 525 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
526
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Alphabetical index
A/C.....................................253, 260
Air conditioning filter..............404
Automatic air conditioning
system ................................ 260
Manual air conditioning
system ................................ 253
ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System) ..................................233
Function ................................233
Warning light .........................450
Air conditioning filter ..............404
Air conditioning
system............................253, 260
Air conditioning filter..............404
Automatic air conditioning
system ................................ 260
Manual air conditioning
system ................................ 253
Airbags .......................................51
Airbag operating
conditions .............................58
Airbag precautions for
your child ..............................53
Airbag warning light ..............449
Correct driving posture............44
Curtain shield airbag
operating conditions .............58
Curtain shield airbag
precautions...........................55
General airbag
precautions...........................53
Locations of airbags................52
Modification and
disposal of airbags ............... 57
Side airbag operating
conditions ............................. 58
Side airbag precautions .......... 55
Side and curtain shield
airbags operating
conditions ............................. 58
Side and curtain shield
airbags precautions .............. 55
SRS airbags............................ 51
Alarm .......................................... 89
Alarm ...................................... 89
Warning buzzer..................... 448
Antenna ............................ 275, 364
Anti-lock brake system
(ABS) ...................................... 233
Function................................ 233
Warning light......................... 450
Ashtray ..................................... 350
Audio input............... 287, 295, 306
Audio system ........................... 270
Antenna ........................ 275, 364
Audio input............................ 306
AUX port ............................... 306
Bluetooth
®
audio................... 316
CD player ............................. 276
iPod....................................... 287
MP3/WMA disc ..................... 281
Optimal use........................... 303
Portable music
player.................................. 306
Radio .................................... 272
Steering wheel audio
switches.............................. 361
USB memory ........................ 295
A
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 526 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
527
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Automatic air conditioning
system
Air conditioning filter..............404
Automatic air conditioning
system ................................ 260
Automatic disconnecting
differential ..............................227
Automatic light
control system.......................199
Automatic transmission.......... 187
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P .....................477
AUX port ...................................306
Auxiliary boxes ........................346
Back window ............................153
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs.............433
Wattage.................................516
Battery
Battery checking ...................390
If the vehicle battery is
discharged..........................478
Preparing and checking
before winter....................... 243
Warning light .........................449
Bluetooth
®
................................308
Registering/removing a
Bluetooth
®
device...............325
Selecting a Bluetooth
®
device .........................326, 327
Wireless
communication ................... 307
Bluetooth
®
audio .....................307
Bluetooth
®
phone ....................307
Deleting the call history......... 333
Making a call.........................319
Managing speed dials ...........320
Managing the contacts..........332
Phone settings ...................... 331
Receiving a call..................... 322
Speaking on the phone......... 319
Boost ventilator system.......... 250
Bottle holders .......................... 345
Brake
Fluid...................................... 512
Parking brake........................ 195
Warning light......................... 448
Brake assist ............................. 233
Break-in tips............................. 159
Brightness control
Instrument panel light
control................................. 102
Care
Aluminum wheels.................. 365
Exterior ................................. 364
Interior................................... 368
Seat belts.............................. 369
CD player.................................. 276
Chains....................................... 245
Child restraint system............... 64
Baby seats, definition.............. 65
Baby seats, installation........... 77
Child seats, definition.............. 65
Child seats, installation ..... 76, 78
Installing CRS with
seat belts........................ 76, 77
Junior seats, definition ............65
Junior seats, installation ......... 79
B
C
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 527 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
528
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Child safety ................................63
Airbag precautions ..................53
Battery precautions.......392, 481
Child restraint system .............64
How your child should
wear the seat belt .................48
Installing child restraints..........75
Power window lock
switch.................................. 150
Power window precautions ...151
Rear door child-protectors ....131
Removed key battery
precautions.........................408
Seat belt precautions ..............50
Seat heater precautions........354
Child-protectors.......................131
Cigarette lighter ....................... 351
Cleaning............................364, 368
Aluminum wheels..................365
Exterior..................................364
Interior...................................368
Seat belts..............................369
Clock......................................... 349
Clutch........................................511
Compass...................................355
Condenser ................................ 389
Console box .............................343
Cooling system
Engine overheating...............482
Cruise control ..........................214
Warning light .........................450
Cup holders..............................344
Curtain shield airbags...............51
Daytime running light
system.................................... 199
Deck hooks .............................. 347
Defogger
Outside rear view mirrors...... 268
Rear window ......................... 268
Windshield .................... 255, 262
Diesel particulate filter
system.................................... 238
Warning light......................... 451
Differential
Limited Slip Differential......... 233
Oil ......................................... 511
Dimension ................................ 490
Display
Multi-information display ....... 104
Trip information..................... 106
Do-it-yourself maintenance .... 374
Doors
Door glasses......................... 149
Door lock............................... 129
Open door warning light........ 452
Outside rear view mirrors...... 146
Rear door child-protectors .... 131
Side doors............................. 129
DPF
Diesel particulate filter
system................................ 238
Warning light......................... 451
Driver’s seat belt
reminder light ........................ 452
Driving
Break-in tips.......................... 159
Correct posture ....................... 44
Procedures ........................... 156
Winter drive tips .................... 243
D
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 528 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
529
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Emergency flashers.................438
Emergency, in case of
If a warning buzzer
sounds................................448
If a warning light turns on......448
If the engine will not start ......476
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P .....................477
If the vehicle battery is
discharged..........................478
If you have a flat tire..............456
If you lose your keys .............114
If you run out of fuel and
the engine stalls.................. 485
If you think something is
wrong..................................446
If your vehicle becomes
stuck ...................................486
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an
emergency..........................439
If your vehicle needs to be
towed..................................441
If your vehicle overheats ....... 482
Engine
“ACC” position ...................... 184
Compartment........................ 380
Engine switch........................ 183
Hood ..................................... 378
How to start the engine......... 183
Identification number ............ 495
If the engine will not start ...... 476
If you run out of fuel and the
engine stalls ....................... 485
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an
emergency.......................... 439
Ignition switch
(engine switch) ................... 183
Overheating ..........................482
Engine coolant
Capacity................................ 508
Checking............................... 387
Preparing and checking
before winter....................... 243
Engine coolant
temperature gauge................ 101
Engine immobilizer system ...... 85
Engine oil
Capacity................................ 500
Checking............................... 383
Oil level warning light............ 453
Oil pressure warning light ..... 449
Preparing and checking
before winter....................... 243
Engine oil maintenance
data......................................... 385
Engine switch
(ignition switch)..................... 183
Engine switch light
(ignition switch light)............ 338
E
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 529 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
530
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Flat tire......................................456
Floor mat ....................................42
Fluid
Automatic transmission......... 509
Brake.....................................512
Clutch....................................511
Steering.................................512
Transfer.................................510
Washer..................................394
Four-wheel drive system
Front drive control lever ........226
Warning light .........................450
Front fog lights
Replacing light bulbs.............431
Switch ...................................201
Wattage.................................516
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light ........................452
Front position lights
Light switch ...........................197
Replacing light bulbs.............426
Wattage.................................516
Front seats
Adjustment............................ 136
Cleaning................................ 368
Correct driving posture............44
Head restraints...................... 141
Seat heaters.......................... 353
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.............428
Turn signal lever ...................194
Wattage.................................516
Fuel
Capacity................................ 497
Fuel filter............................... 396
Fuel gauge............................ 101
Fuel pump shut off system.... 447
Gas station information......... 540
If you run out of fuel
and the engine stalls .......... 485
Information............................ 517
Refueling............................... 209
Type...................................... 497
Warning light......................... 451
Fuel filler door.......................... 209
Refueling............................... 209
Fuel filter .......................... 396, 451
Fuel pump shut off system..... 447
Fuses ........................................ 409
Gas station information .......... 540
Gauges ..................................... 100
Glove box ................................. 343
Hands-free system
(for cellular phone)................ 307
Head restraints ........................ 141
Headlight cleaner..................... 208
Headlights ................................ 197
Light switch........................... 197
Replacing light bulbs............. 424
Wattage ................................ 516
Heaters
Automatic air conditioning
system................................ 260
Manual air conditioning
system................................ 253
Seat heaters ......................... 353
Outside rear view mirrors...... 268
F
G
H
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 530 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
531
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
High mounted stoplight
Replacing..............................435
Hood.......................................... 378
Hooks
Deck hooks ........................... 347
Retaining hooks (floor mat).....42
Horn ..........................................196
Identification
Engine...................................495
Vehicle .................................. 494
Ignition switch (engine
switch).................................... 183
Ignition switch light
(engine switch light)..............338
Illuminated entry system.........340
Immobilizer system ...................85
Indicators....................................94
Initialization
Engine oil maintenance
data.....................................385
Items to initialize ................... 520
Power windows.....................150
Inside rear view mirror ............145
Instrument panel light
control .................................... 102
Intercooler ................................ 389
Interior lights............................338
Switch ...................................340
Wattage.................................516
Jack
Vehicle-equipped jack...........457
Jack handle ..............................463
Jam protection function
Power windows.....................150
Keyless entry ........................... 115
Wireless remote control........ 115
Keys .......................................... 112
Engine switch........................ 183
If you lose your keys .............114
Key number plate.................. 112
Keyless entry ........................ 115
Keys...................................... 112
Replacing the battery............ 406
Wireless remote
control key .......................... 115
Lever
Auxiliary catch lever.............. 378
Front drive control lever........ 226
Hood lock release lever ........ 378
Shift lever...................... 187, 191
Turn signal lever ................... 194
Wiper lever............................ 204
License plate lights
Light switch........................... 197
Replacing light bulbs............. 434
Wattage ................................ 516
Light
Engine switch light................ 338
Fog light switch ..................... 201
Headlight switch.................... 197
Illuminated entry system ....... 340
Interior lights ......................... 340
Interior light list...................... 338
Personal/interior lights .......... 339
Replacing light bulbs............. 423
Turn signal lever ................... 194
Wattage ................................ 516
Light bulbs
Replacing.............................. 423
Wattage ................................ 516
Limited slip differential ........... 233
Lock steering column .............185
I
J
K
L
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 531 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
532
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance ... 374
Maintenance data .................490
Maintenance requirements ...371
Malfunction indicator lamp .....449
Manual headlight
leveling dial............................198
Manual transmission...............191
Meter
Indicators ................................94
Instrument panel light
control.................................102
Meters...................................100
Multi-information display ....... 104
Warning lights .......................448
Microphone .............................. 313
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror ..........145
Outside rear view mirror
defoggers............................268
Outside rear view mirrors......146
Vanity mirrors........................348
MP3 disc ................................... 281
Multimedia system
*
Multi-information display
Set up....................................108
Switching the display ............ 105
Trip information .....................105
Navigation system
*
Odometer.................................. 101
Oil
Differential oil ........................511
Engine oil ..............................500
Manual transmission oil ........510
Transfer oil............................510
Opener
Fuel filler door ....................... 209
Hood ..................................... 378
Outside rear view mirrors ....... 146
Adjusting and folding ............ 146
Outside rear view mirror
defoggers ........................... 268
Outside temperature
display.................................... 106
Overhead console ................... 346
Overheating, Engine................ 482
Parking brake
Operation.............................. 195
Parking brake engaged
warning light ....................... 448
Personal lights......................... 338
Switch ................................... 339
Wattage ................................ 516
Power heater............................ 267
Power outlet ............................. 352
Power steering
Fluid...................................... 512
Power windows
Jam protection function......... 150
Operation.............................. 149
Window lock switch............... 150
Quarter windows ..................... 152
M
N
O
P
Q
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 532 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
533
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Radiator .................................... 389
Radio.........................................272
Radio data system...................273
RDS ...........................................273
Rear differential lock
system....................................230
Rear fog light
Replacing light bulbs.............433
Switch ...................................201
Wattage.................................516
Rear seat
Removing the rear seat
cushions .............................139
Raising the bottom
cushion ............................... 139
Rear step bumper ....................135
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.............433
Turn signal lever ...................194
Wattage.................................516
Rear view mirror
Inside rear view mirror ..........145
Outside rear view mirrors......146
Rear view monitor system ......219
Rear window defogger ............ 268
Refueling ..................................209
Capacity................................497
Fuel types .............................497
Opening the fuel tank cap ..... 209
Replacing
Fuses ....................................409
Light bulbs.............................423
Tires......................................456
Wireless remote control
battery................................. 406
Reset the maintenance data ... 385
Seat belts.................................... 46
Adjusting the seat belt ............ 47
Child restraint system
installation ...................... 76, 77
Cleaning and maintaining the
seat belt.............................. 369
Emergency Locking
Retractor............................... 48
How to wear your seat belt ..... 44
How your child should
wear the seat belt................. 48
Pregnant women, proper
seat belt use ......................... 49
Reminder light and
buzzer................................. 452
Seat belt pretensioners........... 48
SRS warning light ................. 449
Seat heaters ............................. 353
Seats
Adjustment............................ 136
Adjustment precautions ........ 138
Child seats/child restraint
system installation ................ 75
Cleaning................................ 368
Removing the rear seat
cushions ............................. 139
Raising the bottom
cushion............................... 139
Head restraint ....................... 141
Properly sitting in the seat ...... 44
Seat heaters ......................... 353
Sensor
Automatic headlight
system................................ 199
Service reminder
indicators................................. 94
R S
*: Refer to “Navigation system Owner’s manual”.
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 533 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
534
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Shift lever
Automatic transmission......... 187
Front drive control lever ........226
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P .....................477
Manual transmission.............191
Shift lock system .....................477
Side airbags ...............................51
Side doors ................................129
Side mirrors..............................146
Adjusting and folding.............146
Heaters .................................268
Side turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.....430, 435
Turn signal lever ...................194
Wattage.................................516
Snow tires.................................243
Spare tire
Inflation pressure .................. 513
Storage location ....................456
Spark plug ................................508
Specifications .......................... 490
Speedometer............................101
Steering
Column lock release ............. 185
Fluid ......................................512
Steering wheel
Adjustment............................ 144
Audio switches......................361
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs.............433
Wattage.................................516
Storage feature ........................341
Storage precautions................342
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes
stuck................................... 486
Sun visors ................................ 348
Switch
Audio remote control
switches.............................. 361
Cruise control switch............. 214
“DISP” button........................ 105
Door lock switch.................... 130
Emergency flashers switch ... 438
Engine switch........................ 183
Fog light switch ..................... 201
Headlight cleaner switch....... 208
Ignition switch ....................... 183
“INFO.” button....................... 105
Light switches ....................... 197
Outside rear view mirror
switches.............................. 146
Power door lock switch ......... 130
Power window switch............ 149
Rear differential lock
switch ................................. 230
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror
defoggers switch ................ 268
“RESET” button .................... 105
Seat heater switches ............ 353
Window lock switch............... 150
Windshield wipers and
washer switch..................... 204
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 534 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
535
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Tachometer .............................. 101
Tailgate .....................................133
Tail lights
Light switch ...........................197
Replacing light bulbs.............433
Wattage.................................516
Theft deterrent system
Alarm.......................................89
Engine immobilizer system .....85
Tire inflation pressure
Maintenance data .................513
Tires ..........................................397
Chains...................................245
Checking...............................397
If you have a flat tire..............456
Inflation pressure ..........400, 513
Replacing..............................456
Rotating tires.........................397
Size.......................................513
Snow tires .............................243
Spare tire ..............................456
Tools .........................................460
Towing
Emergency towing ................ 441
Towing eyelet........................443
Trailer towing ........................172
Traction control .......................233
Trailer towing ...........................172
Transmission
Automatic transmission......... 187
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P .....................477
Manual transmission.............191
TRC (Traction Control)............ 233
Trip information ....................... 105
Trip meters............................... 101
Turn signal lights
Replacing light
bulbs........... 428, 430, 433, 435
Turn signal lever ................... 194
Wattage ................................ 516
USB port................................... 295
Valet key................................... 112
Vanity mirrors .......................... 348
Vehicle identification
number ................................... 494
Vehicle Stability Control
(VSC) ...................................... 233
VSC (Vehicle Stability
Control) .................................. 233
Warning buzzers
Fuel filter............................... 451
Key reminder ........................ 185
Seat belt reminder ................ 452
T
U
V
W
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 535 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
536
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
Warning lights
ABS....................................... 450
Automatic transmission fluid
temperature ........................450
Brake system ........................448
Charging system................... 449
DPF system ..........................451
Electronic engine control
system ................................ 449
Engine oil change
reminder .............................453
Fuel system........................... 451
Low engine oil level...............453
Low engine oil pressure ........449
Low fuel level ........................452
Malfunction indicator lamp .... 449
Open door............................. 452
Seat belt reminder light.........452
Slip indicator .........................450
SRS.......................................449
Timing belt replacement........450
Unengaged “Park”.................452
Washer
Checking...............................394
Preparing and checking
before winter....................... 243
Switch ...................................204
Washing and waxing ...............364
Weights.....................................491
Wheels ......................................402
Replacing wheels.................. 456
Size.......................................513
Window glasses....................... 149
Window lock switch ................ 150
Windows
Power windows..................... 149
Rear window defogger..........268
Washer ................................. 204
Windshield wipers
Intermittent windshield
wipers................................. 204
Winter driving tips ................... 243
Wireless communication ........ 307
Wireless remote control
key .......................................... 115
Locking/Unlocking................. 115
Replacing the battery............ 406
WMA disc ................................. 281
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 536 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
537
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 537 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
538
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 538 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
539
Alphabetical index
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 539 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
540
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE)
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever Fuel filler door
P. 378
P. 2 11
Hood lock release
lever
Fuel filler door opener Tire inflation pressure
P. 378 P. 211 P. 513
Fuel tank capacity (Reference) P. 497
Fuel type P. 497
Cold tire inflation pressure P. 513
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill
— reference)
Gasoline
engine
L (qt., Imp. qt.)
With filter 5.6 (5.9, 4.9)
Without filter 5.3 (5.6, 4.7)
Diesel
engine
L (qt., Imp. qt.)
With filter 6.9 (7.3, 6.1)
Without filter 6.6 (7.0, 5.8)
Engine oil type P. 498
HILUX_OM_OM0K219E_(EE).book Page 540 Wednesday, May 14, 2014 3:06 PM
… 535 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Toyota Hilux 2014 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Toyota Hilux 2014 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 36,38 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Toyota Hilux 2014

Toyota Hilux 2014 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 536 pagina's

Toyota Hilux 2014 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 540 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info